December 29, 2016 | Author: Salah M. Jawad | Category: N/A
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System V100R003
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) Issue
06
Date
2010-05-25
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose This document uses examples to describe the entire process of the initial configuration of the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 610/620 by using the Web LCT. It can help the readers to easily grasp the method for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 and thus to complete all the actual configuration tasks.
Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
OptiX RTN 600
V100R003
OptiX iManager T2000
V200R007C03
Intended Audience The intended audiences of this document are: l
Installation/Commissioning engineers
l
Data configuration engineers
Before reading this document, you should be familiar with the following information: l
Radio communication basics, especially the basics of network planning
l
Basic functions and slots that are configured to house the boards of the OptiX RTN 600
l
Basic operations of the Web LCT
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
About This Document
Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
iv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
About This Document
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Mouse Operation The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made to previous issues.
Updates in Issue 06 (2010-05-25) Sixth release. The descriptions of the parameters used for configuring the Hybrid/AM attribute, and configuring the LAG protection are optimized.
Updates in Issue 05 (2009-06-15) Fifth formal release. Known defects are fixed. The configuration of the 1588 clock overhead byte is described.
Updates in Issue 04 (2009-04-25) Fourth formal release. Known defects are fixed as required. The descriptions for the parameters such as Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) and Receive Power (dBm) are added. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
About This Document
Updates in Issue 03 (2009-02-25) Third formal release. Known defects are fixed as required.
Updates in Issue 02 (2009-01-10) Second formal release. Known defects are fixed as required.
Updates in Issue 01 (2008-09-20) Initial formal release.
vi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Contents
Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Configuration Preparations......................................................................................................1-1 1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.....................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Preparing Documents.............................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Preparing the Tools................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Selecting the Configuration Mode..................................................................................................................1-2 1.3 Checking Configuration Conditions................................................................................................................1-3
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave..........................2-1 2.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................2-5 2.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................2-5 2.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................2-6 2.2.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................2-15 2.2.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................2-20 2.2.5 Configuring NE3..................................................................................................................................2-27 2.2.6 Configuring NE4 .................................................................................................................................2-32 2.2.7 Configuring NE5..................................................................................................................................2-35
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave..............................3-1 3.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services..............................................................................................3-3 3.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services...........................................................................................3-4 3.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services..................................................................................3-5 3.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services .............................................................................................3-5 3.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services.............................................................................3-5 3.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services..........................................................................3-6 3.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services........................................................................3-7 3.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)..................................................................................3-7 3.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................3-8 3.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................3-8 3.2.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-10 3.2.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................3-14 3.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services).............................................................................3-14 Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Contents
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 3.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-14 3.3.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................3-15 3.3.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-18 3.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................3-23
3.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)....................................................................3-23 3.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-23 3.4.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................3-24 3.4.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-27 3.4.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................3-31 3.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)...............................................................3-31 3.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-32 3.5.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................3-32 3.5.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-35 3.5.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................3-40 3.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)............................................................3-40 3.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................3-41 3.6.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-45 3.6.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................3-53
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave.....................................................4-1 4.1 Configuration Flows........................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Configuration Flow (Microwave Services)............................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)......................................4-4 4.1.3 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)........................................4-6 4.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................4-7 4.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................4-8 4.2.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services)................................................................................................4-9 4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................4-14 4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)..........................................4-18 4.2.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services)..............................................................................................4-20 4.2.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................4-24 4.2.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services)..............................................................................................4-34 4.2.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................4-41 4.2.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board).........................................4-50 4.2.10 Configuring NE3................................................................................................................................4-51
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard..............5-1 5.1 Purpose............................................................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Using the Quick Configuration Wizard..........................................................................................................5-3
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces.....................................6-1 6.1 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)....................................................................................6-2 6.1.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................6-2 viii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Contents
6.1.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................6-3 6.2 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................6-5 6.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................6-6 6.2.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................6-7 6.3 Configuration Example (External Alarms).....................................................................................................6-9 6.3.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................6-9 6.3.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................6-9 6.3.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................6-10
7 Checking the Configuration....................................................................................................7-1 7.1 Checking the NE Configuration......................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Checking the Radio Link.................................................................................................................................7-5
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data..................................................................8-1 8.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)........................................................................................8-2 8.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................8-7
9 Configuration Task Collection................................................................................................9-1 9.1 Managing NEs.................................................................................................................................................9-3 9.1.1 Creating an NE (Searching for the NE)..................................................................................................9-3 9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually.......................................................................................................................9-4 9.1.3 Logging In to an NE...............................................................................................................................9-6 9.1.4 Modifying the NE ID............................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.1.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE.....................................................................................................9-10 9.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards.................................................................................................................9-11 9.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time.................................................................................................................9-12 9.1.8 Localizing the NE Time.......................................................................................................................9-16 9.2 Configuring Radio Links...............................................................................................................................9-18 9.2.1 Creating IF 1+1 Protection...................................................................................................................9-19 9.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup..............................................................................................................9-22 9.2.3 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................9-26 9.2.4 Creating an N+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................9-31 9.2.5 Creating REGs......................................................................................................................................9-33 9.2.6 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute.................................................................................................9-35 9.2.7 Configuring the ATPC Function..........................................................................................................9-37 9.3 Configuring MSP..........................................................................................................................................9-39 9.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP...................................................................................................................9-39 9.3.2 Creating Linear MSP............................................................................................................................9-42 9.4 Configuring SDH/PDH Services (NE Configuration)..................................................................................9-46 9.4.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots ............................................................................................9-46 9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services .....................................................................9-48 9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services.................................................................................9-51 Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Contents
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 9.4.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services.........................................................9-55 9.4.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service.......................................................................................9-57 9.4.6 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services...............................................................................9-57 9.4.7 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services...............................................................................9-61
9.5 Configuring the Clock...................................................................................................................................9-61 9.5.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme...........................................................................................................9-62 9.5.2 Configuring the Clock Sources............................................................................................................9-67 9.5.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources ..........................................................................................9-69 9.5.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output.....................................................................9-72 9.5.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters......................................................................................................9-74 9.6 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces....................................................................................9-74 9.6.1 Configuring the Orderwire...................................................................................................................9-75 9.6.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services.............................................................................................9-78 9.6.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services...........................................................................................9-80 9.6.4 Configuring External Alarms...............................................................................................................9-81 9.7 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports ..............................................................................................9-84 9.7.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces ...................................................................................9-85 9.7.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces ...................................................................................9-86 9.7.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports........................................................................................................9-89 9.7.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports...................................................................................................9-93 9.8 Configuring Overhead Bytes.........................................................................................................................9-96 9.8.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead.................................................................................................9-96 9.8.2 Configuring RSOHs.............................................................................................................................9-97 9.8.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs......................................................................................................................9-98 9.8.4 Configuring VC-3 POHs....................................................................................................................9-102 9.8.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs..................................................................................................................9-104 9.9 Adjusting the Alarm Management Function...............................................................................................9-106 9.10 Enabling/Disabling the Monitoring of the NE Performance.....................................................................9-107 9.11 Configuring Ethernet Ports........................................................................................................................9-108 9.11.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports................................................................................................9-109 9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board........................................................................9-115 9.11.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames....................................................................................9-123 9.11.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth....................................................9-124 9.12 Creating Ethernet Services........................................................................................................................9-125 9.12.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service........................................................................................................9-126 9.12.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service..................................................................................................9-131 9.12.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge.........................................................................................9-136 9.12.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table......................................................................................................9-138 9.12.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service.......................................................................................9-140 9.12.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service...................................................................................................9-140 9.13 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services.........................................................................9-141 9.13.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services...........................................................................9-142 x
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Contents
9.13.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service..................................................................9-142 9.14 Configuring the QoS.................................................................................................................................9-142 9.14.1 Creating a Flow................................................................................................................................9-143 9.14.2 Creating the CAR.............................................................................................................................9-146 9.14.3 Creating the CoS..............................................................................................................................9-149 9.14.4 Binding the CAR/CoS......................................................................................................................9-151 9.14.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping......................................................................................................9-152 9.14.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board..........................................................................................9-154 9.14.7 Modifying CAR Parameters.............................................................................................................9-155 9.14.8 Modifying CoS Parameters..............................................................................................................9-156 9.15 Creating a LAG.........................................................................................................................................9-157 9.16 LPT Configuration....................................................................................................................................9-165 9.17 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature..............................................................................................9-169 9.17.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually ..................................................................9-170 9.17.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry........................................................9-172 9.17.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol ........................................................................................9-173 9.17.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol.......................................................................................9-177 9.17.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item..................................................................9-179 9.17.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function................................................................9-180 9.18 Configuring the Service Access of NEs....................................................................................................9-181 9.18.1 Configuring the LCT Access to NEs................................................................................................9-181 9.18.2 Configuring the Ethernet Access to an NE......................................................................................9-182 9.18.3 Configuring the Serial Port Access to an NE...................................................................................9-183
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1 A.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................A-2 A.2 A-E................................................................................................................................................................A-2 A.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................A-7 A.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................A-10 A.5 P-T...............................................................................................................................................................A-12 A.6 U-Z..............................................................................................................................................................A-16
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Figures
Figures Figure 2-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-2 Planning the radio link........................................................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-3 IDU board configuration (NE1)..........................................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-4 IDU board configuration (NE2)..........................................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-5 IDU board configuration (NE3)..........................................................................................................2-8 Figure 2-6 IDU board configuration (NE4)..........................................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-7 IDU board configuration (NE5)..........................................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-8 Timeslot allocation diagram.............................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-9 Clock Synchronization Scheme........................................................................................................2-14 Figure 3-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................3-8 Figure 3-2 IDU board configuration ...................................................................................................................3-8 Figure 3-3 Configuring Ethernet services............................................................................................................3-9 Figure 3-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-5 Networking diagram.........................................................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-6 IDU board configuration (NE1)........................................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)........................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-8 Configuring Ethernet services..........................................................................................................3-16 Figure 3-9 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................3-17 Figure 3-10 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................3-24 Figure 3-11 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)......................................................................................3-24 Figure 3-12 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-13 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................3-26 Figure 3-14 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................3-32 Figure 3-15 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................3-33 Figure 3-16 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)......................................................................................3-33 Figure 3-17 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................3-33 Figure 3-18 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................3-35 Figure 3-19 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................3-41 Figure 3-20 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................3-41 Figure 3-21 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)......................................................................................3-42 Figure 3-22 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................3-42 Figure 3-23 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................3-44 Figure 4-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................4-9 Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Figures
Figure 4-2 Link planning diagram .....................................................................................................................4-10 Figure 4-3 Board layout of the IDU (NE1)........................................................................................................4-11 Figure 4-4 Board layout of the IDU (NE2)........................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-5 Board layout of the IDU (NE3)........................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-6 Timeslot allocation diagram.............................................................................................................4-13 Figure 4-7 Clock synchronization scheme.........................................................................................................4-13 Figure 4-8 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters...........................................................................4-15 Figure 4-9 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3......................................... 4-19 Figure 6-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................6-2 Figure 6-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services..............................................................................6-3 Figure 6-3 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-4 Timeslot allocation diagram ..............................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-5 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................6-9 Figure 9-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order..............................................................................................9-47 Figure 9-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme ..................................................................9-47 Figure 9-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network.........................................................................9-63 Figure 9-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network............................................................................9-64 Figure 9-5 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line) .............................................................................................................................................................................9-65 Figure 9-6 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line) .............................................................................................................................................................................9-66 Figure 9-7 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports....................... 9-67
xiv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Tables
Tables Table 1-1 Configuration mode.............................................................................................................................1-2 Table 2-1 Flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave..................................2-2 Table 2-2 Service requirements............................................................................................................................2-6 Table 2-3 Planning information of the radio link.................................................................................................2-7 Table 2-4 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection ......................................................................................................2-9 Table 2-5 Information of IF ports (NE1 and NE2).............................................................................................2-10 Table 2-6 Information of IF ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5)..................................................................................2-10 Table 2-7 Information of ODU ports (NE1 and NE2)........................................................................................2-11 Table 2-8 Information of ODU ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5).............................................................................2-11 Table 2-9 Clock information..............................................................................................................................2-14 Table 2-10 Orderwire information.....................................................................................................................2-14 Table 3-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards......................3-3 Table 3-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services............................................................................3-4 Table 3-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services...................................................................3-5 Table 3-4 Flow for configuring 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services...............................................................3-6 Table 3-5 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services............................................................3-6 Table 3-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..................................................................................................3-9 Table 3-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...................................................................................................3-9 Table 3-8 Parameters of external Ethernet ports................................................................................................3-16 Table 3-9 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.................................................................................................3-16 Table 3-10 Parameters of EPL services..............................................................................................................3-17 Table 3-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................3-25 Table 3-12 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................3-25 Table 3-13 Parameters of EPL services..............................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-14 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................3-33 Table 3-15 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................3-34 Table 3-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..............................................................................................3-34 Table 3-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................3-42 Table 3-18 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................3-43 Table 3-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..............................................................................................3-44 Table 4-1 Configuring services based on the Hybrid microwave........................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board..................................4-5 Table 4-3 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board....................................4-7 Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
Tables
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) Table 4-4 Link capacity......................................................................................................................................4-10 Table 4-5 Information for planning a radio link.................................................................................................4-10 Table 4-6 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection.....................................................................................................4-12 Table 4-7 Clock information.............................................................................................................................. 4-14 Table 4-8 Orderwire information....................................................................................................................... 4-14 Table 4-9 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board............................................................................... 4-15 Table 4-10 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board...............................................................................4-15 Table 4-11 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1).........................................................................4-16 Table 4-12 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2).........................................................................4-16 Table 4-13 Flow configuration...........................................................................................................................4-17 Table 4-14 Parameters of the CARa...................................................................................................................4-17 Table 4-15 Parameters of the CoS......................................................................................................................4-18 Table 4-16 Parameters of the link aggregation group........................................................................................ 4-18 Table 4-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports.............................................................................................. 4-19 Table 4-18 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2).............................................................................4-19 Table 4-19 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)............................................................................................ 4-19 Table 5-1 Purpose of the quick configuration......................................................................................................5-2 Table 6-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port.........................................................................................6-3 Table 6-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services.................................................................................6-6 Table 6-3 Configuration of the external alarms..................................................................................................6-10 Table 7-1 NE status checklist...............................................................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Software version checklist...................................................................................................................7-3 Table 7-3 Clock checklist.....................................................................................................................................7-3 Table 7-4 1+1 protection checklist.......................................................................................................................7-3 Table 7-5 Cross-connection and SNCP checklist.................................................................................................7-4 Table 7-6 Alarm and abnormal event checklist....................................................................................................7-4 Table 7-7 ECC routing checklist..........................................................................................................................7-4 Table 7-8 XPIC checklist.....................................................................................................................................7-5 Table 7-9 N+1 protection checklist......................................................................................................................7-5 Table 7-10 IF 1+1 protection checklist.................................................................................................................7-6 Table 7-11 Hybrid/AM attribute checklist...........................................................................................................7-6 Table 7-12 IF configuration checklist..................................................................................................................7-7 Table 7-13 ODU configuration checklist.............................................................................................................7-7 Table 8-1 Task collection (NE attributes)............................................................................................................8-2 Table 8-2 Task collection (radio link)..................................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-3 Task collection (services).....................................................................................................................8-5 Table 8-4 Task collection (clock).........................................................................................................................8-6 Table 8-5 Task collection (orderwire)..................................................................................................................8-7 Table 8-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave).............................................8-7 Table 8-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave).........................................8-9 Table 9-1 Parameters of the standard NTP server..............................................................................................9-15 Table 9-2 Parameters of the access control rights..............................................................................................9-15
xvi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Tables
Table 9-3 Parameters of the standard NTP key management.............................................................................9-16 Table 9-4 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters......................................................................9-74 Table 9-5 Common alarm management functions...........................................................................................9-106 Table 9-6 Methods used by ports to process data frames.................................................................................9-115 Table 9-7 Methods used by ports to process data frames.................................................................................9-122 Table 9-8 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT................................................................................................9-167 Table 9-9 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................................................................9-168
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
1
1 Configuration Preparations
Configuration Preparations
About This Chapter Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations. The preparations to be made before the configuration are as follows: 1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data. 1.2 Selecting the Configuration Mode You can select the proper configuration mode according to the actual configuration scenarios. 1.3 Checking Configuration Conditions Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
1 Configuration Preparations
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data. 1.1.1 Preparing Documents The documents required for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 include the network planning documents and configuration guides. 1.1.2 Preparing the Tools A computer that is properly configured with the NMS software must be available.
1.1.1 Preparing Documents The documents required for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 include the network planning documents and configuration guides. l
Network planning documents, such as the XXX Network Planning
l
Configuration guides –
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Commissioning Guide
–
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide
1.1.2 Preparing the Tools A computer that is properly configured with the NMS software must be available. NOTE
For information about the software and hardware required for installing the NMS and the installation method, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT User Guide.
1.2 Selecting the Configuration Mode You can select the proper configuration mode according to the actual configuration scenarios. Table 1-1 Configuration mode Configuration Scenario
1-2
Reference
Applicable Phase
Service Type
Initial phase
SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/ PDH Microwave
Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/ PDH Microwave
Services based on the Hybrid microwave
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
1 Configuration Preparations
Configuration Scenario Applicable Phase
Reference
Service Type 1. The NE must be configured with the SDH/PDH microwave services only in one direction.
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizarda
2. The RF system must be configured with the 1+1 protection or the 1+0 nonprotection. 3. The service boards of the NE must contain only one E1 interface board. Initial phase, commissioning phase, and operating phase
Services and functions of the auxiliary interfaces
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
Commissioning phase and operating phase
Adding and modifying the configuration data
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
NOTE
a: In the case of quick configuration, the microwave services must meet the three prerequisites listed in the "Service Type" column. Otherwise, only partial configurations are complete.
1.3 Checking Configuration Conditions Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements. l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
To configure a gateway NE, ensure that the following requirements are met: –
The NE must be powered on properly.
–
The NE must be connected to the computer that is installed with the NMS.
–
The network communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.
To configure a non-gateway NE, ensure that the following requirements are met: –
The NE must be powered on properly.
–
The gateway NE to which this NE belongs must be connected to the computer on which the NMS is installed.
–
The ECC communication between this NE and the gateway NE must be normal.
–
The network communication between the NMS and the gateway NE must be normal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
About This Chapter The IDU 610 and IDU 620 have the built-in ADMs. Hence, you need to create the crossconnections when you configure the SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave. 2.1 Configuration Flow The configuration flow includes the procedure for configuring the SDH/PDH services and the procedures for configuring the basic NE information, such as the NE attributes and radio links. 2.2 Configuration Example This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to SDH/PDH service requirements.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2.1 Configuration Flow The configuration flow includes the procedure for configuring the SDH/PDH services and the procedures for configuring the basic NE information, such as the NE attributes and radio links. Table 2-1 Flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave Step
Description
1
Managing NEs
2
Configuring radio links
Remarks Creating an NE
Required.
Logging in to an NE
Required.
Modifying the NE ID
Required.
Modifying the IP address of an NE
Optional.
Configuring logical boards
Required.
Synchronizing the NE time
Required.
Configuring the IF 1+1 protection
Required when the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured. For details about the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Creating an XPIC workgroup
Required when the XPIC is configured. For details about the XPIC, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
Required.
Configuring the ATPC attributes
Required when you set the ATPC threshold manually. For details about the ATPC, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
2-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Step
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Description
Remarks Configuring an N+1 protection
Required when you configure a 2+1 protection. Required when you configure a 3+1 protection. For details about the N+1 protection, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3
Configuring the MSP
Creating REGs
Required when you configure a 3+1 protection on a slave NE.
Configuring the ring MSP
Required when you configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. For details about the twofiber bidirectional MSP ring, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Configuring the linear MSP
Required when you configure the 1+1 or 1:N linear MSP. For details about the linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
4
Creating the crossconnections of services
Creating the cross-connections of point-to-point services
Required when nonSNCP services are configured.
Creating the cross-connections of SNCP services
Required when you configure the SNCP. For details about the SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
5
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Configuring the clock
Configuring the clock source
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Required (except when only the internal clock source is used).
2-3
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Step
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Description
Remarks Configuring protection for the clock sources
Required when the SSM or extended SSM clock protection is configured.
Modifying the parameters of the external clock output
Required when you set the external clock output to the 2 MHz mode or set the external clock output threshold.
Customizing the clock parameters
Optional.
6
Configuring the orderwire
Configuring the orderwire
Required.
7
Setting the parameters of various interfaces
Setting the parameters of SDH interfaces
Optional.
Setting the parameters of PDH interfaces
Required when you configure the T3 services.
Setting the parameters of IF interfaces
Required when you disable the XPIC or activate the WS service. For details about the XPIC, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
8
Configuring the overhead bytes
Setting the interface parameters of the ODU
Optional.
Configuring the RSOHs
Required when the J0_MM alarm is generated on the local or remote equipment.
Configuring the VC-4 POHs
Required when the TIM or SLM alarm is generated on the local or remote equipment.
Configuring the VC-3 POHs Configuring the VC-12 POHs 9
2-4
Customizing the alarm management scheme
Customizing the alarm management scheme
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Optional.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
2.2 Configuration Example This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to SDH/PDH service requirements. 2.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 2.2.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 2.2.3 Configuring NE1 This topic describes how to configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 2.2.4 Configuring NE2 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 2.2.5 Configuring NE3 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 2.2.6 Configuring NE4 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE4 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 2.2.7 Configuring NE5 NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 605. Therefore, the configuration of NE5 is not contained in this manual.
2.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. Figure 2-1 shows a tree network. Basic information of this network is as follows: l
NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 620.
l
NE4 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 610.
l
NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 605 1B.
l
The E1 services need to be converged from each NE to the STM-1 optical line board at the client side. Table 2-2 lists the service requirements.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Figure 2-1 Networking diagram NE1
NE2
NE4
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620)
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620)
SDH OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 610) NE3
NE5
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 620)
OptiX RTN 600 (IDU 605 1B)
Table 2-2 Service requirements Source
Sink
STM-1 optical line board at the client side
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
8xE1
8xE1
8xE1
20xE1
2xE1
2.2.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. In the following example, the engineering planning covers all the information required for configuring NE1–NE5.
NE Attributes
2-6
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
Equipment Type
IDU 620
IDU 620
IDU 620
IDU 610
IDU 605
NE ID
101
102
103
104
105
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
Extended ID
9 (the same as the default value)
9 (the same as the default value)
9 (the same as the default value)
9 (the same as the default value)
9 (the same as the default value)
NE IP
129.9.0.101
129.9.0.102
129.9.0.103
129.9.0.104
129.9.0.105
Planning the Radio Link All the ODUs adopted by the OptiX RTN 600 on the tree network work at subband A of the 15 GHz frequency band with the T/R spacing of 420 MHz, thus decreasing the types of the required spare parts. Figure 2-2 Planning the radio link NE4 (IDU 610)
V-polarization NE2 14547MHz (IDU 620) Tx Hi Tx Low 14967MHz Tx Hi 14930 MHz V-polarization
NE1 (IDU 620)
14510 MHz Tx Low
Tx Low 14532 MHz
14952 MHz
NE3 (IDU 620)
V-polarization NE5 (IDU 605)
Tx Hi 14930 MHz
H-polarization Tx Hi
14510 MHz Tx Low
Table 2-3 Planning information of the radio link Parameter
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3
Link 4
TX High
NE1
NE3
NE4
NE3
TX Low
NE2
NE2
NE2
NE5
Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz)
14930
14952
14967
14930
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-7
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3
Link 4
Transmit Frequency of TX High Station (MHz)
14510
14532
14547
14510
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420
420
420
420
Radio Work Mode
STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM
16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM
22E1, 14MHz, 32QAM
2E1, 3.5MHz, QPSK
Link Protection Mode
1+1
1+0
1+0
1+0
Polarization Directiona
V (vertical polarization)
H ((horizontal polarization)
V (vertical polarization)
V (vertical polarization)
NOTE a: Information other than the polarization direction, which is not related to the link planning is not provided in this section.
Board Configuration Information Figure 2-3 IDU board configuration (NE1)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT IF1A
Slot7
EXT
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT SL1
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PO1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Figure 2-4 IDU board configuration (NE2)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT IF1A
Slot7
IF1A EXT
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT IF1A
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PO1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Figure 2-5 IDU board configuration (NE3)
FAN FAN Slot 20
2-8
EXT IF0A
Slot7
EXT
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PO1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Figure 2-6 IDU board configuration (NE4) PD1
Slot3
IF1A
Slot4
PXC
Slot1
SCC
Slot2
Figure 2-7 IDU board configuration (NE5) PW
SCC
EOW
PF1
IF0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 8
NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not displayed in the board configuration diagram. In the case of the IDU 620, n ranges from 5 to 8. In the case of the IDU 610, n is fixed to 4. In the case of the IDU 605, n can be 7 or 8.
Attributes of the IF 1+1 Protection Table 2-4 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
Protection Group ID
1
1
Protection Type
HSB (default value)
HSB (default value)
Working Slot
Slot 5
Slot 5
Protection Slot
Slot 7
Slot 7
Revertive Mode
Revertive (default value)
Revertive (default value)
WTR Time
600s (default value)
600s (default value)
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled (default value)
Enabled (default value)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-9
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Information of IF Ports Table 2-5 Information of IF ports (NE1 and NE2) Parameter
IF Attri butes
ATP C
NE1
NE2
5-IF1A (7-IF1A)
5-IF1A (7-IF1A)
6-IF1A
8-IF1A
Work Mode: 7
Work Mode: 7
Work Mode: 6
Work Mode: 10
Service Capacity: STM-1
Service Capacity: STM-1
Service Capacity: 16xE1
Service Capacity: 22xE1
Signal Bandwidth: 28 MHz
Signal Bandwidth: 28 MHz
Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz
Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz
Modulation: 128QAM
Modulation: 128QAM
Modulation: 16QAM
Modulation: 32QAM
Radio Link ID
101
101
102
103
Wayside Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
Not supported
Not supported
Wayside Input Board
Slot 1
Slot 1
-
-
Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
NE4
NE5
Radio Work Mode
Table 2-6 Information of IF ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5) Parameter
IF Attri butes
2-10
NE3 5-IF1A
7-IF0A
5-IF1A
8-IF0
Work Mode: 6
Work Mode: 18
Work Mode: 10
Work Mode: 18
Service Capacity: 16xE1
Service Capacity: 2xE1
Service Capacity: 22xE1
Service Capacity: 2xE1
Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz
Signal Bandwidth: 3.5 MHz
Signal Bandwidth: 14 MHz
Signal Bandwidth: 3.5 MHz
Modulation: 16QAM
Modulation: QPSK
Modulation: 32QAM
Modulation: QPSK
Radio Link ID
102
104
103
104
Wayside Enable Status
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Wayside Input Board
-
-
-
-
Radio Work Mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
ATP C
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
NE3
NE4
NE5
5-IF1A
7-IF0A
5-IF1A
8-IF0
Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Information of ODU Ports Table 2-7 Information of ODU ports (NE1 and NE2) Parameter
NE1
NE2
15-ODU (17ODU)
15-ODU (17ODU)
16-ODU
18-ODU
Transmission Frequency (MHz)
14930
14510
14532
14547
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420
420
420
420
Power Attributes
Transmit Power (dBm)
10
10
10
10
Equipment Attributes (The equipment attributes can be planned but cannot be set.)
Station Type
TX High
TX Low
TX Low
TX Low
Radio Frequency Properties
NOTE
Note: The attributes of the main and standby ODUs on NE1 and NE2 are the same.
Table 2-8 Information of ODU ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5) Parameter
Radio Frequency Properties
NE3
Transmission Frequency (MHz)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
NE4
NE5
15-ODU
17-ODU
15-ODU
18-ODU
14952
14930
14967
14510
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-11
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
NE3
NE4
NE5
15-ODU
17-ODU
15-ODU
18-ODU
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420
420
420
420
Power Attributes
Transmit Power (dBm)
10
10
10
10
Equipment Attributes (The equipment attributes can be planned but cannot be set.)
Station Type
TX High
TX High
TX High
TX Low
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 2-8 Timeslot allocation diagram NE1 Station
NE1
Timeslot VC4-1
6-SL1 VC12: 1-8 4-PO1:1-8
Links-1: NE1 - NE2 - NE3 -NE5 Station Timeslot
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE5
6-SL1 5-IF1A 5-IF1A 6-IF1A 5-IF1A 7-IF0A VC12: 9-16 VC12: 9-16 4-PO1:1-8 VC12: 17-24 VC12: 17-24 VC12:1-8
VC4-1
4-PO1:1-8 VC12:9-10
4-SL1 VC12:25-26
VC12:25-26
8-IF0
VC12:1-2 4-PF1:1-2
4-SL1 Links-2: NE1 - NE2 - NE4 Station Timeslot VC4-1
NE1
NE2
6-SL1 5-IF1A VC12: 27-46
VC12: 27-46
NE4
5-IF1A 8-IF1A
5-IF1A VC12: 1-20
4-SL1
4-PD1:1-20
Add/Drop Foward NOTE
On the radio links of NE3, NE4, and NE5, the E1 signals are directly mapped into the timeslots corresponding to the PDH radio frames. Figure 2-8 considers VC-12 timeslots as an example to illustrate how the timeslots are allocated.
2-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Figure 2-8 shows the timeslot allocation for the services between the NEs. l
l
l
l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
E1 services of NE1: –
The services are added to/dropped from ports 1–8 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE1.
–
The E1 services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1–8 on the optical line of the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1.
E1 services of NE2: –
The services are added to/dropped from ports 1–8 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE2.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 9–16 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1.
E1 services of NE3: –
The services are added to/dropped from ports 1–8 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE3.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1–8 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 17–24 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1.
E1 services of NE4: –
The services are added to/dropped from ports 1–20 of the PD1 board in slot 4 on NE4.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1–20 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE2.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 27-46 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1.
E1 services of NE5: –
The services are added to/dropped from ports 1–2 of the PF1 board in slot 4 on NE5.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 1–2 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 7 on NE3 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE5.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 7 on NE3.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 9–10 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3.
–
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board in slot 6 on NE2.
–
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 25–26 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-13
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave –
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in slot 6 on NE1.
Clock Information Figure 2-9 Clock Synchronization Scheme NE1
NE2
NE4
SDH
5-IF1A/7-IF1A/ Internal
6-SL1/Internal
5-IF1A/Internal NE3
5-IF1A/Internal
Master clock
NE5
8-IF0/Internal
Table 2-9 Clock information Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
Cl oc k So ur ce
First Clock Source
6-SL1
5-IF1A
5-IF1A
5-IF1A
8-IF0
Second Clock Source
Internal Clock Source
7-IF1A
Internal Clock Source
Internal Clock Source
Internal Clock Source
Third Clock Source
-
Internal Clock Source
-
-
-
Orderwire Information Table 2-10 Orderwire information
2-14
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
Telephone No.
101
102
103
104
105
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
Call Waiting Time (s)
5
5
5
5
5
Orderwire Port
5-IF1A-1, 6SL1-1
5-IF1A-1, 6IF1A-1, 8IF1A-1
5-IF1A-1, 7SL1-1
5-IF1A-1
8-IF0
Orderwire Occupied Bytes
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
2.2.3 Configuring NE1 This topic describes how to configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l
New ID: 101
l
New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l
IP: 129.9.0.101
Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
3.
Click New. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-15
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Protection Group ID
1
If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE.
Working Mode
HSB
In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
Revertive Mode
Revertive
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
600
WTR Time(s)
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable
Working Board
5-IF1A-1
Protection Board
7-IF1A-1
In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5–8. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link.
2-16
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3.
Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on the radio link. After setting the information about the 5-IF1A or 15-ODU on the radio link, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
7,STM-1,28MH z,128QAM
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Link ID
101
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 101.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14930.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 5 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-17
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l
Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
l
Bidirectional
Source
6-SL1
In this example, the 6-SL1 is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-8
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
Sink
4-PO1
In this example, the 4-PO1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-8
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
Configure the cross-connections of the pass-through services as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
Source
2-18
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Bidirectional
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
9-46
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 9-46.
Sink
6-SL1
In this example, the 6-SL1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
9-46
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 9-46.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l
Phone 1: 101
l
Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 6-SL1-1
Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
6-SL1-1
In this example, the 6-SL1-1 is the clock source.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Clock Source
6-SL1-1
Internal Clock Source
In this example, the 6-SL1-1 and internal clock source are set as the available clock sources.
Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest)
1
2
l
This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source.
l
The priority level of the 6-SL1-1 clock source is 1 and the priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
Description
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-19
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2.2.4 Configuring NE2 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l
New ID: 102
l
New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l
IP: 129.9.0.102
Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
3.
Click New. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
2-20
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Protection Group ID
1
If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE.
Working Mode
HSB
In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
Revertive Mode
Revertive
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
WTR Time(s)
600
l
After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable
Working Board
5-IF1A-1
Protection Board
7-IF1A-1
In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5–8. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3.
Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on the first radio link, the information about the 6-IF1A and 16-ODU on the second radio link, and the information about the 8IF1A and 18-ODU on the third radio link. Then, click Apply. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
7,STM-1,28MH z,128QAM
-
Link ID
101
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 101.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14510.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-21
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
l
l
2-22
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Set the parameters of the 6-IF1A and 16-ODU as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM
-
Link ID
102
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 102.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14532.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Set the parameters of the 8-IF1A and 18-ODU as follows.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
10,22E1,14MH z,32QAM
-
Link ID
103
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 103.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14547.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 5 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-23
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Repeat Step 5.1 to Step 5.2 to set the ATPC parameters of the 6-IF1A and 8-IF1A to the same values. Click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l
Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
2-24
Bidirectional
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
9-16
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 9-16.
Sink
4-PO1
In this example, the 4-PO1 is the service sink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-8
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1–8.
Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE3 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
l
Bidirectional
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
17-26
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
Sink
6-IF1A
In this example, the 6-IF1A is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10.
Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE4 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Bidirectional
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-25
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
27-46
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 27-46.
Sink
8-IF1A
In this example, the 8-IF1A is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-20
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-20.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l
Phone 1: 102
l
Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 6-IF1A-1, 8-IF1A-1
Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK.
3.
2-26
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
5-IF1A-1
In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 is the clock source.
7-IF1A-1
In this example, the 7-IF1A-1 is the clock source.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Paramet er
Value Range
Clock Source
5-IF1A-1
7-IF1A-1
Description Internal Clock Source
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
In this example, the 5-IF1A-1, 7IF1A-1, and internal clock source are set as the available clock sources.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Paramet er
Value Range
Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 is the highest)
1
2
Description 3
l
This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source.
l
The priority level of the 5IF1A-1 clock source is 1. The priority level of the 7-IF1A-1 clock source is 2. The priority level of the internal clock source is 3.
----End
2.2.5 Configuring NE3 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l
New ID: 103
l
New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l
IP: 129.9.0.103
Step 3 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3.
Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on one radio link and the information about the 7-IF0A and 17-UDU on the other radio link. Then, click Apply. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU as follows. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-27
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
l
2-28
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM
-
Link ID
102
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 102.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14952.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Set the parameters of the 7-IF0A and 17-ODU as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
18,2E1,3.5MHz ,QPSK
-
Link ID
104
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 104.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14930.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 4 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
3.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Repeat Step 4.1 to Step 4.2 to set the ATPC parameters of the 7-IF0A to the same values. Click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-29
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Clock > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l
Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
l
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-8
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
Sink
4-PO1
In this example, the 4-PO1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-8
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE5 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
2-30
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
9-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 9 and 10.
Sink
7-IF0A
In this example, the 7-IF0A is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-2
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1 and 2.
Step 6 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l
Phone 1: 103
l
Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF0A-1
Step 7 Configure the clock source. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
5-IF1A-1
In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 is the clock source.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Clock Source
5-IF1A-1
Internal Clock Source
In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source are set as the clock sources.
Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest)
1
2
l
This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source.
l
The priority level of the 5-IF1A-1 clock source is 1 and the priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
Description
----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-31
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2.2.6 Configuring NE4 This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE4 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l
New ID: 104
l
New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l
IP: 129.9.0.104
Step 3 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
2-32
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3.
Set the information about the 4-IF1A and 14-ODU on the radio link. Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Work Mode
10,22E1,14MHz ,32QAM
-
Link ID
103
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 103.
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
TX Frequency (MHz)
14967.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 4 Configure the ATPC attributes. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the transmit power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the receive level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Cross- Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the crossconnections of the add/drop services. Click OK.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the crossconnections.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-33
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
4-IF1A
In this example, the 4-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6)
1-20
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1–20.
Sink
3-PD1
In this example, the 3-PD1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-20
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1–20.
Step 6 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l
Phone 1: 104
l
Orderwire Port: 4-IF1A-1
Step 7 Configure the clock source. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK.
3.
2-34
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
4-IF1A-1
In this example, the 4-IF1A-1 is selected as the clock source.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Clock Source
4-IF1A-1
Description Internal Clock Source
In this example, the 4-IF1A-1 and internal clock source are selected as the clock sources.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest)
1
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Description 2
l
This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source.
l
The priority level of the 4-IF1A-1 clock source is 1 and the priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
----End
2.2.7 Configuring NE5 NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 605. Therefore, the configuration of NE5 is not contained in this manual. For details, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 605 Configuration Guide.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-35
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
About This Chapter In the case of the SDH/PDH microwave, Ethernet services are transmitted in a mode that is similar to transmitting the Ethernet services over the SDH. Hence, you need to configure the mapping relation between the Ethernet services and VCTRUNKs, the paths bound with the VCTRUNKs, and the cross-connections of transmission lines. 3.1 Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before you configure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NE configurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links). 3.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL service requirements. 3.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL service requirements. 3.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service requirements. 3.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. 3.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services.
3-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.1 Configuration Flow This topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before you configure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NE configurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links). 3.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services Point-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-point EPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth. 3.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services The PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN of an Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPL services, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags. 3.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared pointto-point virtual private line services for different users. 3.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services The QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags. 3.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services A bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different 802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLAN services. 3.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services A bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different 802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services. 3.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags.
3.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services Point-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-point EPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth. Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used to configure point-to-point EPL services. Table 3-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Procedur e
Operation
Remarks
1
Configuring external Ethernet ports
Required
2
Configuring internal Ethernet ports
Required
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Procedur e
Operation
Remarks
3
Creating EPL services
l
Required when the Ethernet switching boards are used
l
Not required when the Ethernet transparent transmission boards are used
4
Creating cross-connections of Ethernet services
Required
3.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services The PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN of an Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPL services, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the PORT-shared EVPL services. Table 3-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services Step
Operation
Remarks
1
Configuring external Ethernet ports
Required.
2
Configure internal Ethernet ports
Required.
3
Creating Ethernet private line services
Required.
4
Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Required.
5
Configuring the QoS
Optional. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmissio n System Feature Description.
NOTE
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared pointto-point virtual private line services for different users. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. Table 3-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services Step
Operation
Remarks
1
Configuring external Ethernet ports
Required.
2
Configure internal Ethernet ports
Required.
3
Creating Ethernet private line services
Required.
4
Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Required.
5
Configuring the QoS
Optional. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmissio n System Feature Description.
NOTE
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services The QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags. For the method of configuring QinQ-based EVPL services, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services A bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different 802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLAN services. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Table 3-4 Flow for configuring 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services Step
Operation
Remarks
1
Configuring external Ethernet ports
Required.
2
Configure internal Ethernet ports
Required.
3
Creating Ethernet LAN services
Required.
4
Modifying the mounted port of a bridge
Required when you need to set the port to the Spoke port.
5
Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Required.
6
Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature
Optional.
7
Configuring the QoS
Optional.
NOTE
l
Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually, configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For details about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services A bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different 802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same 802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services. Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services. Table 3-5 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services
3-6
Step
Operation
Remarks
1
Configuring external Ethernet ports
Required.
2
Configure internal Ethernet ports
Required.
3
Creating Ethernet LAN services
Required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Step
Operation
Remarks
4
Modifying the mounted port of a bridge
Required when you need to set the port to the Spoke port.
5
Creating the VLAN filtering table
Required.
6
Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Required.
7
Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature
Optional.
8
Configuring the QoS
Optional.
NOTE
l
Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually, configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For details about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags. The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services are implemented based on the QinQ technology. For details, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL service requirements. 3.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 3.2.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 3.2.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 3.2.4 Configuring NE2 Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
3.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 3-1, NE1 and NE2 adopt the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: l
The two branches of User A that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each other over Ethernet. A 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l
The two branches of User B that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each other over Ethernet. A 20 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l
The service of User A need be isolated from the service of User B.
l
The Ethernet equipment of User A and User B provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.
Figure 3-1 Networking diagram User A1
User A2 NE2
NE 1
User B2
User B1
3.2.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 and NE2 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create point-to-point EPL services.
Board Configuration Information Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 3-2 IDU board configuration
FAN FAN Slot 20
3-8
EXT IF1A
Slot7
EXT EFT4
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 3-3 Configuring Ethernet services NE1:8-EFT4 PORT1 User A1 PORT2 User B1
NE2:8-EFT4 VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
PORT1 User A2 PORT2 User B2
SDH
Table 3-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
8-EFT4
8-EFT4
Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
Maximum Frame Length
1522
1522
1522
1522
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Table 3-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
8-EFT4
8-EFT4
Port
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Encapsulation Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
LCAS Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Bound Path
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5
VC4-2: VC12-6– VC12-15
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5
VC4-2: VC12-6– VC12-15
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 3-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot
1#VC4
NE1 5-IF1A-1
NE2 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21 8-EFT4 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EFT4 8-EFT4 VC4-2:6-15 VC4-2:6-15 Add/Drop
l
l
The EPL service of User A is as follows: –
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services.
The EPL service of User B is as follows: –
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22–31 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services.
3.2.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The EFT4 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.
3-10
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Port
PORT1
Description PORT2
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
2.
Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.
3.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
a.
Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
b.
Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUN K1
l
Mapping Protocol
GFP
VCTRU NK2
l
The mapping protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the LCAS tab.
b.
Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRU NK1
Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUN K2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
4.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
l
In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.
l
The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the Bound Path tab.
b.
Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c.
In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as the ports to be configured.
d.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Configura ble Ports
VCTRUN K1
In this example, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths.
Level
VC12
In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
VCTRUN K2
Step 3 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l
3-12
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6)
17-21
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
Sink
8-EFT4
In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6)
1-5
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5.
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6)
22-31
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31.
Sink
8-EFT4
In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6)
6-15
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-15.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
----End
3.2.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. For details, see 3.2.3 Configuring NE1.
3.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL service requirements. 3.3.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 3.3.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 3.3.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 3.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
3.3.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 3-5, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service requirements are as follows:
3-14
l
The headquarters C1 of User C are located at NE1 and the two branches of User C (C2 and C3) are located at NE2 and NE3. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 100 to 110. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 200 to 210.
l
The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 require a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.
l
The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Figure 3-5 Networking diagram User C2 NE 1
User C1
NE2
VLAN100-110 VLAN200-210 NE3 User C3
3.3.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create PORT-shared EVPL services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create PORTshared EVPL services.
Board Configuration Information Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 3-6 IDU board configuration (NE1)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT IF1A
Slot7
EXT EMS6
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PD1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Figure 3-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)
FAN FAN Slot 20
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
EXT
Slot7
EXT EFT4
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 3-8 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EFT4 PORT1 User C2
VCTRUNK1
NE1:8-EMS6
VC4-2:VC12:1-10 VCTRUNK1
PORT1 User C1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10 VCTRUNK2
NE3:8-EFT4
VC4-2:VC12:11-20
PORT1 User C3
VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-10
SDH
Table 3-8 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Board
8-EMS6
8-EFT4
8-EFT4
Port
PORT1
PORT1
PORT1
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame Length
1522
1522
1522
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
TAG
Tag Aware
-
-
Entry Detection
Enabled
-
-
Table 3-9 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports
3-16
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Board
8-EMS6
8-EFT4
8-EFT4
Port
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Encapsulation Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
NE1
Entry Detection
Enabled
Bound Path
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-10
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
NE2
NE3
Enabled
-
-
VC4-2: VC12-11– VC12-20
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-10
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-10
Table 3-10 Parameters of EPL services Parameter
NE1 Private Line Service 1
Private Line Service 2
Board
8-EMS
Service Type
EPL
Direction
Bidirectional
Source Port
PORT1
PORT1
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3–6)
100-110
200-210
Sink Port
VCRTUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3–6)
100-110
200-210
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 3-9 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot
1#VC4
NE2 5-IF1A-1
NE1 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-10 VC4-2:1-10
7-IF1A1-1
NE3 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:11-20 VC4-2:1-10
Add/Drop
l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
The EVPL service from C1 to C2 is as follows: –
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE2.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services.
The EVPL service from C1 to C3 is as follows: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
–
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–26 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and NE3.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 11–20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–20 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services.
3.3.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
Set the basic attributes of PORT1.
l
The services of user C1 use PORT1.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The services of user C1 use PORT1.
l
If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
l
If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
TAG
3-18
Tag Aware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Entry Detection
Enabled
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
2.
Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.
3.
4.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
a.
Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
b.
Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUN K1
l
Mapping Protocol
GFP
VCTRU NK2
l
The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the LCAS tab.
b.
Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRU NK1
Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
VCTRUN K2
l
In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.
l
The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Port
VCTRUNK1
Description VCTRUNK2
TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
l
If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
l
If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Entry Detection
5.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Enabled
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the Bound Path tab.
b.
Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c.
In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured.
d.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Configura ble Ports
VCTRUN K1
In this example, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths.
Level
VC12
In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
VCTRUN K2
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. l
3-20
Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as follows.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the service source port.
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
100-110
The services whose VLAN IDs range from 100 to 110 are the source services.
Sink Port
VCTRUNK1
In this example, the VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
100-110
The services whose VLAN IDs range from 100 to 110 are the sink services.
Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the service source port.
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
200-210
The services whose VLAN IDs range from 200 to 210 are the source services.
Sink Port
VCTRUNK2
In this example, the VCTRUNK2 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
200-210
The services whose VLAN IDs range from 200 to 210 are the sink services.
Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-21
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave l
l
3-22
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-26
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
1-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10.
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
7-IF1A
In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-26
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
11-20
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 11–20.
----End
3.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 are point-to-point EPL services, and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details, see 3.2.3 Configuring NE1.
3.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service requirements. 3.4.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 3.4.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 3.4.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 3.4.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
3.4.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 3-10, NE1 and NE2 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1 and NE2. The new service requirements are as follows: Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-23
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
The two branches of User D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.
l
The two branches of User E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each other.
l
The services of User D need to be isolated from the services of User E. The traffic of User D and User E, however, is supplementary to each other, and thus can share the 20 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l
The Ethernet equipment of User D and User E provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.
Figure 3-10 Networking diagram User D2
User D1 NE 1
12
NE2
User E1
User E2
3.4.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 and NE2 need to use Ethernet switching boards to create VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
Board Configuration Information Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EMS6 board. Figure 3-11 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)
FAN FAN Slot 20
3-24
EXT
Slot7
EXT EMS6
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 3-12 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EMS6
NE1:8-EMS6 PORT1 User D1
EPL1
PORT2 User E1
EPL2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
EPL1
PORT1 User D2
EPL2
PORT2 User E2
SDH
Table 3-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
8-EMS6
8-EMS6
Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
Maximum Frame Length
1522
1522
1522
1522
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
TAG
Access
Access
Access
Access
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Default VLAN ID
100
200
100
200
VLAN Priority
0
0
0
0
Table 3-12 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
8-EMS6
8-EMS6
Port
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Encapsulation Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-25
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Bound Path
VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-10
VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-10
Table 3-13 Parameters of EPL services Parameter
NE1
NE2
EPL Service 1
EPL Service 2
EPL Service 1
EPL Service 2
Board
8-EMS
8-EMS
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Source Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3–6)
100
200
100
200
Sink Port
VCRTUNK1
VCRTUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK2
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3–6)
100
200
100
200
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 3-13 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot
1#VC4
NE1
NE2
5-IF1A-1
5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-26 8-EMS6 VC4-2:1-10
8-EMS6 VC4-2:1-10
Add/Drop
3-26
l
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services of User D and User E occupy VC-12 timeslots 17– 26 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2.
l
VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE2 are used to add/ drop the services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.4.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Port
PORT1
PORT2
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set.
l
The services of user D1 use PORT1 and the services of user E1 use PORT2.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Port
PORT1
TAG
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Description
Access
Description PORT2
l
The tag attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set.
l
The services of user D1 use PORT1 and the services of user E1 use PORT2.
If TAG is set to Access: l
The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded.
l
The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-27
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Default VLAN ID
100
Entry Detection
Description 200
Enabled
l
In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 100 for PORT1.
l
In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 200 for PORT2.
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port.
2.
Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.
3.
4. 3-28
a.
Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
b.
Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUNK 1
l
Mapping Protocol
GFP
l
The encapsulation protocol of VCTRUNK1 needs to be set. In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GPF.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNK. a.
Click the LCAS tab.
b.
Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUN K1
In this example, Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1.
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
l
In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.
l
The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUNK1
The tag attributes of VCTRUNK1 need to be set.
TAG
Tag Aware
l
If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
l
If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Entry Detection
5.
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Enabled
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the Bound Path tab.
b.
Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c.
In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be bound.
d.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Configura ble Ports
VCTRUNK1
In this example, VCTRUNK1 needs to be bound with VC paths.
Level
VC12
In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as follows.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-29
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
l
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the service source port.
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
100
The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service.
Sink Port
VCTRUNK1
In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
100
The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.
Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT2 and VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the service source port.
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
200
The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service.
Sink Port
VCTRUNK1
In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
200
The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service.
Step 4 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
3-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-26
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
1-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10.
----End
3.4.4 Configuring NE2 You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. For details, see 3.4.3 Configuring NE1.
3.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services. 3.5.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 3.5.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 3.5.3 Configuring NE1 Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-31
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 3.5.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
3.5.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 3-14, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service requirements are as follows: l
The three branches of User F, which are F1, F2, and F3, are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3. F1 need communicate with F2 and F3, and thus a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. Communication is not required between F2 and F3.
l
The Ethernet equipment of User F provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports, of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN. The VLAN ID and the number of the VLANs are unknown and may be changed.
Figure 3-14 Networking diagram NE2 User F2
NE 1 User F1
NE3 User F3
3.5.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, the 802.1q VB is used to implement EPLAN services of which the user VLAN is not defined. NE1 needs to be configured with Ethernet switching boards. NE2 and NE3 need to be configured with Ethernet transparent transmission boards. 3-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Board Configuration Information Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 3-15 IDU board configuration (NE1)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT IF1A
Slot7
EXT EMS6
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PD1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Figure 3-16 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT
Slot7
EXT EFT4
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Ethernet Parameter Configuration Figure 3-17 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EFT4 PORT1 User F2
VCTRUNK1
NE1:8-EMS6
VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK1
PORT1 User F1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2
NE3:8-EFT4
VC4-2:VC12:6-10
VB1
PORT1 User F3
VCTRUNK1 VC4-2:VC12:1-5
SDH
Table 3-14 Parameters of external Ethernet ports
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Port
PORT1
PORT1
PORT1
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-33
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame Length
1522
1522
1522
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Entry Detection
Disabled
-
-
Table 3-15 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Port
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Encapsulation Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Entry Detection
Disabled
Disabled
-
-
Bound Path
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5
VC4-2: VC12-6– VC12-10
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5
VC4-2: VC12-1– VC12-5
Table 3-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services Parameter
Ethernet LAN services of NE1
Board
8-EMS
VB Name
VB1
VB Type
802.1d
Bridge Switch Mode
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
VB Mount Port
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Hub/Spoke
3-34
PORT1
Hub
VCTRUNK1
Spoke
VCTRUNK2
Spoke
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 3-18 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot
1#VC4
NE2 5-IF1A-1
NE3
NE1 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5
7-IF1A1-1
5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 8-EMS6 VC4-2:6-10 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:6-15
Add/Drop
l
The Ethernet LAN service of User F occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.
l
VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop the Ethernet LAN service from NE1 to NE2.
l
VC-12 timeslots 6–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop the Ethernet LAN service from NE1 to NE3.
3.5.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The services of user F1 use PORT1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-35
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in autonegotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to AutoNegotiation.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The services of user F1 use PORT1.
Entry Detection
Disabled
If Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the VLAN IDs of the packets are not checked.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Set the parameters of VCTRCUNK1 and VCTRCUNK2.
2.
Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.
3.
3-36
a.
Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
b.
Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRUN K1
l
Mapping Protocol
GFP
VCTRU NK2
l
The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the LCAS tab.
b.
Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Port
VCTRU NK1
Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
VCTRUN K2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4.
5.
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Enabling LCAS
Enabled
l
In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.
l
The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Port
VCTRUNK1
Entry Detection
Disabled
Description VCTRUNK2
TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2. If Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the VLAN IDs of the packets are not checked.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the Bound Path tab.
b.
Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c.
In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured.
d.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Paramete r
Value Range
Description
Configura ble Ports
VCTRUN K1
In this example, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths.
Level
VC12
In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
VCTRUN K2
Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters as follows.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-37
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.
4.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
VB Name
VB1
In this example, VB Name is set to VB1.
VB Type
802.1d
In this example, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
Bridge Switch Mode
SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d)
In this example, a transparent bridge is created, and the VLAN IDs of the packets over each port need not be checked.
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Parameter
Value Range
Description
selected forwarding ports
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 are connected to the bridge.
Click OK.
Step 4 Modify the mounted port of bridge. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select the created bridge. Click the Service Mount tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Paramet er
Value Range
Mount Port
PORT1
Hub/ Spoke
Hub
VCTRUN K1
Spoke
Description VCTRUN K2
Spoke
l
Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 as the mount ports.
l
Only the port that is selected as Mount Port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge.
The Spoke ports cannot access each other. The Hub port and the Spoke port can access each other. The Hub ports can access each other.
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services.
3-38
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-21
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
1-5
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5.
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
7-IF1A
In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-21
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-39
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
6-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-10.
----End
3.5.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details, see 3.2.3 Configuring NE1.
3.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services. 3.6.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 3.6.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. 3.6.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 3.6.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
3.6.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 3-19, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service requirements are as follows: 3-40
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
l
The three branches of User G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need form a LAN, and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l
The three branches of User H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need form a LAN, and share a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l
The service of User G need be isolated from the service of User H.
l
The Ethernet equipment of User G and User H provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.
Figure 3-19 Networking diagram NE2
User G2
User H2
User G1 NE 1
User H1 NE3
User G3
User H3
3.6.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs. In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create Ethernet LAN services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create Ethernet LAN services.
Board Configuration Information Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board. Figure 3-20 IDU board configuration (NE1)
FAN FAN Slot 20
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
EXT IF1A
Slot7
EXT EMS6
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PD1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-41
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Figure 3-21 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT
Slot7
EXT EFT4
Slot8
EXT IF1A
Slot5
EXT
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the networking diagram, you can plan the configuration diagram and parameters of the Ethernet services on the two VLANs that are implemented by using the 802.1q network bridge. Figure 3-22 Configuring Ethernet services NE2:8-EFT4 PORT1 User G2
VCTRUNK1
NE1:8-EMS6 VLAN 100 PORT1 User G1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT2 User H2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
VC4-2:VC12:1-5 VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-10
VLAN 200 PORT2 User H1
VCTRUNK3
NE3:8-EFT4
VC4-2:VC12:11-20 VCTRUNK4
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:21-30
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VB1
PORT1 User G3 PORT2 User H3
VCTRUNK2 VC4-2:VC12:6-15
SDH
Table 3-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports
3-42
Paramete r
NE1
NE2
NE3
Board
8-EMS6
8-EFT4
8-EFT4
Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Paramete r
NE1
NE2
NE3
Working Mode
AutoNegotiatio n
AutoNegotiatio n
AutoNegotiatio n
AutoNegotiatio n
AutoNegotiatio n
AutoNegotiatio n
Maximum Frame Length
1522
1522
1522
1522
1522
1522
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
TAG
Access
Access
-
-
-
-
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
-
-
Default VLAN ID
100
200
-
-
-
-
VLAN Priority
0
0
-
-
-
-
Table 3-18 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Param eter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Board
8-EMS6
8-EFT4
8-EFT4
Port
VCTR UNK1
VCTR UNK2
VCTR UNK3
VCTR UNK4
VCTR UNK1
VCTR UNK2
VCTR UNK1
VCTR UNK2
Encaps ulation Mappin g Protoco l
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
Enablin g LCAS
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
TAG
Access
Access
Access
Access
-
-
-
-
Entry Detecti on
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
Enable d
-
-
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-43
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Param eter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Default VLAN ID
100
100
200
200
-
-
-
-
VLAN Priority
0
0
0
0
-
-
-
-
Bound Path
VC4-2: VC121– VC125
VC4-2: VC126– VC1210
VC4-2: VC1211– VC1220
VC4-2: VC1221– VC1230
VC4-2: VC121– VC125
VC4-2: VC126– VC1215
VC4-2: VC121– VC125
VC4-2: VC126– VC1215
Table 3-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services Parameter
Ethernet LAN services of NE1
Board
8-EMS
VB Name
VB1
VB Type
802.1q
Bridge Switch Mode
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Mount Port
PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4
VLAN Filtering Table
Filtering Table
VLAN Filtering Table 1
VLAN Filtering Table 2
VLAN ID
100
200
Forwarding Port
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
PORT2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 3-23 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services Station Timeslot
1#VC4
NE2 5-IF1A-1
NE1 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:1-5 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:11-20 VC4-2:6-15
7-IF1A1-1
NE3 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:6-10 VC4-2:1-5 VC12:22-31 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 VC4-2:21-30 VC4-2:6-15
Add/Drop
3-44
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
l
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
The Ethernet LAN service of User G: –
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 17–21 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/ drop services between NE1 and NE2.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 6–10 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 1–5 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/ drop services between NE1 and NE3.
The Ethernet LAN service of User H: –
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 22–31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 22–31 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 11–20 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE2.
–
Uses VC-12 timeslots 21–30 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12 timeslots 6–15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop services between NE1 and NE3.
3.6.3 Configuring NE1 You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Port
PORT1
Enabled/ Disabled Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enabled
Description PORT2
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set.
l
The services of user G1 use PORT1 and the services of user H1 use PORT2.
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-45
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of the external ports should be set to Auto-Negotiation.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Port
PORT1
TAG
Description PORT2
Access
Default VLAN ID
Entry Detection
100
200
Enabled
l
The tag attributes of PORT1 and PORT2 need to be set.
l
The services of user G1 use PORT1 and the services of user H1 use PORT2.
l
If TAG is set to Access, the packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded.
l
If TAG is set to Access, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received.
l
In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 100 for PORT1.
l
In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 200 for PORT2.
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports.
3-46
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port.
2.
Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. a.
Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
b.
Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param eter
Value Range
Port
VCTRU NK1
VCTRU NK2
Description VCTR UNK3
VCTRU NK4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l
The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3.
4.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Param eter
Value Range
Description
Mappi ng Protoc ol
GFP
l
In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GFP.
Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the LCAS tab.
b.
Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Param eter
Value Range
Port
VCTRU NK1
Enabli ng LCAS
Enabled
VCTRU NK2
Description VCTR UNK3
VCTRU NK4
Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. l
In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.
l
The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Param eter
Value Range
Port
VCTRU NK1
TAG
Access
VCTRU NK2
Description VCTR UNK3
VCTRU NK4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
TAG Attributes need to be set for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. l
If TAG is set to Access, the packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded.
l
If TAG is set to Access, the packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority and are then received.
3-47
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
5.
Param eter
Value Range
Description
Entry Detecti on
Enabled
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs. a.
Click the Bound Path tab.
b.
Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c.
In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured.
d.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Param eter
Value Range
Config urable Ports
VCTRU NK1
Level
VC12
In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12 level.
Service Directi on
Bidirectional
l
If Service Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Availa ble Resour ces
3-48
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
VCTRU NK2
Description VCTR UNK3
VCTRU NK4
VC4-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
In this example, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are used to bind VC paths.
In this example, VC4-2 is the available resource.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Param eter
Value Range
Availa ble Timesl ots
VC12-1 to VC12-5
VC12-6 to VC12-1 0
Description VC1211 to VC1220
VC12-2 1 to VC12-3 0
l
VCTRUNK1 is bound with timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5.
l
VCTRUNK2 is bound with timeslots VC12-6 to VC12-10.
l
VCTRUNK3 is bound with timeslots VC12-11 to VC12-20.
l
VCTRUNK4 is bound with timeslots VC12-21 to VC12-30.
Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters as follows.
3.
4.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
VB Name
VB1
In this example, VB Name is set to VB1.
VB Type
802.1q
In this example, an IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
Bridge Switch Mode
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q)
If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tags are checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded.
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Parameter
Value Range
Description
selected forwarding ports
PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4
PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are connected to the bridge.
Click OK.
Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select the created bridge. Click the VLAN Filtering tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-49
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
VLAN ID(e.g: 1,3-6)
100
-
selected forwarding ports
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 are connected to the bridge.
Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
VLAN ID(e.g: 1,3-6)
200
-
selected forwarding ports
PORT2, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4
PORT2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are connected to the bridge.
Step 5 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. l
3-50
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-21
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
1-5
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-5.
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
7-IF1A
In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
17-21
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 17-21.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
6-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 6-10.
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK3 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-51
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
l
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Source
5-IF1A
In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
22-31
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
11-20
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 11-20.
Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK4 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12 level.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source
7-IF1A
In this example, the 7-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
22-31
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 22-31.
Sink
8-EMS6
In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4
VC4-2
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3– 6)
21-30
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 21-30.
----End
3-52
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave
3.6.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3 You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should be configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details, see 3.2.3 Configuring NE1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-53
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
About This Chapter The Hybrid microwave that the OptiX RTN 600 supports can transmit E1 services and Ethernet services at the same time. When E1 services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you need to create the cross-connections. When Ethernet services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you need not configure the encapsulation and mapping in the VCTRUNKs or the cross-connections between the VCTRUNKs and line timeslots. 4.1 Configuration Flows The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Configuring the services based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services and configuring the accessed Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through the Ethernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2, or are accessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2. 4.2 Configuration Example This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configure the NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybrid microwave.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4.1 Configuration Flows The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Configuring the services based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services and configuring the accessed Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through the Ethernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2, or are accessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2. 4.1.1 Configuration Flow (Microwave Services) Configuring microwave services involves configuring the basic information of the OptiX RTN NE, including the NE attributes and radio links. 4.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and then transmitted to the IFH2 board. 4.1.3 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according the CoS.
4.1.1 Configuration Flow (Microwave Services) Configuring microwave services involves configuring the basic information of the OptiX RTN NE, including the NE attributes and radio links. Table 4-1 Configuring services based on the Hybrid microwave Step
Operation
1
Managing NEs
2
Configuring radio links
Remarks Creating an NE
Required.
Logging in to an NE
Required.
Modifying the NE ID
Required.
Modifying the IP address of an NE
Optional.
Configuring logical boards
Required.
Synchronizing the NE time
Required.
Configuring IF 1+1 protection
Required when the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD is configured. For details about the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link 4-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Required.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Step
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Operation
Remarks Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute
For details about the Hybrid microwave, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Setting the ATPC attributes
Required when you set the ATPC threshold manually. For details about the ATPC, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3
Configuring MSP
Setting the parameters of IF interfaces
Optional when you adjust the ATPC threshold.
Setting the parameters of ODU interfaces
Optional.
Configuring ring MSP
Required when you configure a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. For details about the twofiber bidirectional MSP ring, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Configuring linear MSP
Required when you configure the 1+1 or 1:N linear MSP. For details about the linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
4
Creating the crossconnections of services
Creating the cross-connections of point-to-point services
Required when nonSNCP services are configured.
Creating the cross-connections of SNCP services
Required when you configure the SNCP. For details about the SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Step
Operation
5
Configuring the clock
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Remarks Configuring the clock source
Required (except when only the internal clock source is used).
Configuring protection for the clock source
Required when the SSM or extended SSM clock protection is configured.
Changing the parameter values of the external clock output
Required when you set the output external clock to the 2 MHz mode or set the external clock output threshold.
Customizing the clock parameters
Optional.
6
Configuring the orderwire
Configuring the orderwire
Required.
7
Setting the parameters of various interfaces
Setting the parameters of SDH interfaces
Optional.
Setting the parameters of PDH interfaces
Required when you configure the T3 services.
Configuring the overhead bytes
Configuring the 1588 overhead
Required when the Packet microwave equipment is installed at the opposite end.
Configuring the RSOHs
Required when the J0_MM alarm is generated on the local or remote equipment.
Configuring the VC-4 POHs
Required when the TIM or SLM alarm is generated on the local or remote equipment.
8
Configuring the VC-3 POHs Configuring the VC-12 POHs 9
Customizing the alarm management scheme
Customizing the alarm management scheme
Optional.
4.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and then transmitted to the IFH2 board. 4-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Table 4-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board Step
Operation
1
Configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board
Remarks Configuring the external port of an Ethernet board
Required. This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board so that the IFH2 board can interconnect with the EMS6 board through this Ethernet port. The IFH2 board provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function.
2
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Configuring the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board
Configuring the external port of an Ethernet board
Required. l
This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the EMS6 board that is used to access the user services.
l
This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the EMS6 board so that the EMS6 board can interconnect with the IFH2 board through this Ethernet port.
Creating Ethernet private line services
Required when you need to configure Ethernet private line services.
Creating Ethernet LAN services
Required when you need to configure Ethernet LAN services.
Modifying the mounted port of a bridge
Required when you need to set Hub/Spoke Attribute to Spoke, thus isolating the communication between different ports.
Creating the VLAN filtering table
Required when you need to create the 802.1q bridge.
Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature
Optional.
Configuring the QoS
Optional.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Step
Operation
3
Configuring the 1+1 protection for the Ethernet services in the Hybrid microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Remarks Creating a link aggregation group
Required when the Hybrid microwave uses the IF 1+1 protection.
NOTE
l
The procedure for configuring the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board (described in Step 2) is similar to the procedure for configuring the Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave. In both the configuration scenarios, you need not configure the Ethernet cross-connections. The only difference is that you need to configure the external port during the configuration of the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board, but you need to configure the internal port (VCTRUNK) during the configuration of the Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave.
l
The configurations in Step 2 do not include the configuration of QinQ-based EVPL services and the configuration of 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services. For details about the QinQ, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l
Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the entries of the MAC address table manually, configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For details about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l
For details about the link aggregation group, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
4.1.3 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according the CoS.
4-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Table 4-3 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board Step
Operation
Remarks
1
Configuring the external Ethernet port of an Ethernet board
Required. This task is performed to configure the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board that is used to access the user services. The IFH2 board provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function.
Configuring the CoS
2
Optional.
NOTE
For details about the CoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
4.2 Configuration Example This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configure the NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybrid microwave. 4.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 4.2.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 4.2.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services) Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
You can configure the microwave service data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 4.2.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 4.2.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services) You can configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 4.2.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. 4.2.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board normally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling. 4.2.10 Configuring NE3 You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
4.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. In the network shown in Figure 4-1, NE1 and NE2 use the IDU 620 and NE3 uses the IDU 605. The service requirements are as follows:
4-8
l
The Ethernet equipment of user A, user B, and user C provides 100 Mbit/s auto-negotiative Ethernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet equipment of user A does not support VLAN tags. The services of user A are frames that do not carry VLAN tags, namely, untagged framed. The Ethernet equipment of user B and user C supports VLAN tags. Hence, the services of user B and user C are frames that carry VLAN tags, namely, tagged frames.
l
User A has two branches (user A1 and user A2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. The Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. After the user services are accessed, the default VLAN ID of 300 is added to the services.
l
User B has two branches (user B1 and B2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There are 2xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet services are voice over IP (VoIP) services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The transmission of the VoIP services must be stable. The VLAN ID is 100. The other part of the Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. The VLAN ID is 200.
l
The radio link between NE1 and NE2 uses the 1+1 HSB configuration.
l
User C has two branches, which are located at NE2 and NE3. There are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet services are VoIP services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The transmission of the VoIP services must be stable and the VLAN priority level is 7. The other part of the Ethernet services are
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly and the VLAN priority level is 1. Figure 4-1 Networking diagram User A2 User A1 User C2 NE2 (IDU 620) NE1 (IDU 620) User B1 User B2 User C1 NE3 (IDU 605 1F)
4.2.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. The engineering planning information includes all the information that is required for configuring the microwave services on NE1, NE2, and NE3.
NE Attributes Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Equipment Type
IDU 620
IDU 620
IDU 605 1F
NE ID
101
102
103
Extended ID
9 (default value)
9 (default value)
9 (default value)
NE IP
129.9.0.101
129.9.0.102
129.9.0.103
Planning a Radio Link As described in the engineering requirements, there are two Hybrid radio links, which are the radio link between NE1 and NE2 and the radio link between NE2 and NE3. Figure 4-2 shows the link planning information. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Figure 4-2 Link planning diagram NE1 (IDU 620)
H-polarization NE2 (IDU 620)
Tx Hi 14930 MHz 14510 MHz Tx Low
Tx Low
14952 MHz
14532 MHz NE3 (IDU 605 1F)
V-polarization Tx Hi
NOTE
NE1, NE2, and NE3 use the ODUs that operate on sub-band A of the 15 GHz frequency band with a T/R spacing of 420 MHz. Hence, fewer types of spare parts are required.
In addition, the networking diagram shows the capacity information of the two Hybrid radio links, as listed in Table 4-4. Table 4-4 Link capacity Radio Link
Number of E1 Services
Capacity of E1 Services (Mbit/s)
Assured Ethernet Service Capacity (Mbit/ s)
Maximum Ethernet Service Capacity (Mbit/s)
Link between NE1 and NE2
6
12
4
34
Link between NE2 and NE3
4
8
4
24
The Hybrid radio link can be planned properly according to the previous information and the actual engineering requirements. Table 4-5 provides the planning information of the Hybrid radio link in this example. Table 4-5 Information for planning a radio link Parameter
Link 1
Link 2
TX High Station
NE1
NE3
TX Low Station
NE2
NE2
4-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Link 1
Link 2
TX Frequency at the TX High Station (MHz)
14930
14952
TX Frequency at the TX Low Station (MHz)
14510
14532
T/R Spacing(MHz)
420
420
TX Power(dBm)
10 (The TX power must be the same at both ends.)
10 (The TX power must be the same at both ends.)
Channel Spacing(MHz)
14
14
E1 Capacity of the Hybrid Network 6
4
AM Enable Status
Enable
Enable
AM Mode
Asymmetric
Asymmetric
Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
32QAM
32QAM
Radio Link ID
101
102
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
Link Protection Mode
1+1 HSB
1+0
Polarization Directiona
H (horizontal polarization)
V (vertical polarization)
NOTE a: The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization direction) is not provided in this example.
Board Layout Figure 4-3 Board layout of the IDU (NE1)
FAN FAN Slot 20
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
EXT IFH2
Slot7
EXT
Slot8
EXT IFH2
Slot5
EXT EMS6
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-11
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Figure 4-4 Board layout of the IDU (NE2)
FAN FAN Slot 20
EXT IFH2
Slot7
IFH2 EXT
Slot8
EXT IFH2
Slot5
EXT EMS6
Slot6
PXC PXC
Slot3
EXT PH1
Slot4
PXC PXC
Slot1
SCC SCC
Slot2
Figure 4-5 Board layout of the IDU (NE3) PW48B
SCC
EOW
PH1
EMS4
IFH1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 8
NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not shown in the board layout diagram. In the case of the IDU 620, "n" ranges from five to eight whereas in the case of the IDU 605, "n" is 7 or 8.
Attributes of the IF 1+1 Protection Table 4-6 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection
4-12
Parameter
NE1
NE2
Protection Group ID
1
1
Protection Type
HSB (default value)
HSB (default value)
Working Slot
Slot 5
Slot 5
Protection Slot
Slot 7
Slot 7
Revertive Mode
Revertive (default value)
Revertive (default value)
WTR Time(s)
600 (default value)
600 (default value)
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled (default value)
Enabled (default value)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Timeslot Allocation Figure 4-6 Timeslot allocation diagram NE2
NE3
5-IFH2 8-IFH2
8-IFH1
NE1
Station
5-IFH2
E1: 1-4 4-PH1:7-10 Timeslot
4-PH1:1-4
E1: 1-6 4-PH1:1-6 4-PH1:1-6
Add/Drop
As shown in Figure 4-6, the timeslots are allocated for the services between the NEs as follows. l
The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE1 is as follows: The services that are added or dropped over ports 1–6 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE1 occupy the 1–6 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE1 and the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE2.
l
l
The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE2 is as follows: –
The services are that added or dropped over ports 1–6 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE2 occupy the 1–6 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE1 and the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE2.
–
The services are that added or dropped over ports 7–10 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE2 occupy the 1–4 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 8 of NE2 and the IFH1 board in slot 8 of NE3.
The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE3 is as follows: The services are that added or dropped over ports 1–4 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE3 occupy the 1–4 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 8 of NE2 and the IFH1 board in slot 8 of NE3.
Clock Information Figure 4-7 Clock synchronization scheme NE1
NE2
BITS External clock source 1/Internal clock source
5-IFH2(SDH-1)/ 7-IFH2(SDH-1)/ Internal clock source
Direction of the main clock
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-13
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Table 4-7 Clock information Parameter
NE1
NE2
Clock Source
First Clock Source
5-IFH2(SDH-1)
External clock source 1
Second Clock Source
7-IFH2(SDH-1)
Internal clock source
Third Clock Source
Internal clock source
-
Orderwire Information Table 4-8 Orderwire information Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Telephone No.
101
102
103
Call Waiting Time(s)
5
5
-
Selected Orderwire Port
5-IFH2-1
5-IFH2-1
-
Orderwire Occupied Bytes
E1
E1
-
4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs.
4-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Configuration Information of Ethernet Parameters Figure 4-8 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters NE1: 5-IFH2 (main) NE1: 15-ODU (main)
NE1: 6-EMS6
NE2: 5-IFH2 NE2: (main) 15-ODU (main)
PORT1
PORT3 (main)
PORT3 (main) User A1 User B1
NE2: 6-EMS6
PORT1
PORT1
PORT1
LAG
LAG
PORT2
PORT2
NE1: 17-ODU (standby)
PORT4 (slave)
NE2: 17-ODU (standby)
User A2 User B2
PORT4 (slave)
PORT1
PORT1
NE1: 7-IFH2 (standby)
NE2: 7-IFH2 (standby)
Network cable IF cable
Table 4-9 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
6-EMS6
6-EMS6
Port
PORT1–PORT4
PORT1–PORT4
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame Length
1522
1522
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
TAG
PORT1: Access (default VLAN ID: 300)
PORT1: Access (default VLAN ID: 300)
PORT2–PORT4: Tag Aware
PORT2–PORT4: Tag Aware
Enabled
Enabled
Entry Detection
Table 4-10 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
NE1
Board
5-IFH2
NE2 7-IFH2
5-IFH2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-IFH2 4-15
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
NE1
NE2
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
AutoNegotiation
Flow Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Table 4-11 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1) Parameter
NE1 Private Line Service 1 (User A1)
Private Line Service 2 (User B1, VoIP Service)
Private Line Service 3 (User B1, Internet Service)
Board
6-EMS
Service Type
EPL
EPL
EPL
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Source Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT2
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
300
100
200
Sink Port
PORT3
PORT3
PORT3
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
300
100
200
Table 4-12 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2) Parameter
NE2 Private Line Service 1 (User A2)
4-16
Private Line Service 2 (User B2, VoIP Service)
Private Line Service 3 (User B2, Internet Service)
Board
6-EMS
Service Type
EPL
EPL
EPL
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Source Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT2
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
300
100
200
Sink Port
PORT3
PORT3
PORT3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
NE2
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Private Line Service 1 (User A2)
Private Line Service 2 (User B2, VoIP Service)
Private Line Service 3 (User B2, Internet Service)
300
100
200
Configuration Information of the QoS Table 4-13 Flow configuration Paramet er
NE1
Board
6-EMS
Flow Type
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
Port
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN ID
300
Bound CAR Bound CoS
User A1
NE2 User B1, VoIP Service
User B1, Internet Service
User A2
User B2, VoIP Service
User B2, Internet Service
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
PORT2
100
200
300
100
200
1
–
2
1
–
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
6-EMS
Table 4-14 Parameters of the CARa
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
6-EMS
6-EMS
CAR ID
1
2
1
2
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Committed Information Rate (kbit/ 10240 s)
20480
10240
20480
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)
0
0
0
0
Peak Information Rate (kbit/s)
20480
40960
20480
40960
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-17
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
NE1
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
0
NE2 0
0
0
NOTE
a: You can limit the Ethernet service rate on a port of the EMS6 board, by performing the corresponding configuration of the CAR that is bound with the port.
Table 4-15 Parameters of the CoS Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
6-EMS
6-EMS
CoS ID
1
2
3
1
2
3
CoS Type
simple
simple
simple
simple
simple
simple
CoS Priority
7
3
2
7
3
2
Configuration Information of the Link Aggregation Group Table 4-16 Parameters of the link aggregation group Parameter
NE1
NE2
Board
6-EMS
6-EMS
LAG No.
1
1
LAG Name
LAG_1
LAG_1
LAG Type
Manual
Manual
Load Sharing
Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive
Main Port
PORT3
PORT3
Selected Slave Ports
PORT4
PORT4
4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 4-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Figure 4-9 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3
NE2: 18-ODU User C2
NE3: 5-EMS4
NE3: 8-IFH1
NE2: 8-IFH2 NE3: 18-ODU
PORT1
PORT1
User C1
Network cable IF cable
Table 4-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports Parameter
NE2
NE3
Board
8-IFH2
5-EMS4
Port
PORT1
PORT1
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Enable Symmetric Flow Control
Disabled
Table 4-18 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2) CoS Parameter
CoS Priority
User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag
3
User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag
1
Table 4-19 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Ethernet LAN Service
Board
5-EMS4
VB Name
VB1
VB Type
802.1d
Bridge Switch Mode
SVL/Ingress Filter Disable
Mount Port
PORT1, IFUP1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-19
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
4.2.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services) You can configure the microwave service data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l
New ID: 101
l
New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l
IP: 129.9.0.101
Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
3.
Click New. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
4-20
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Protection Group ID
1
If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE.
Working Mode
HSB
In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
Revertive Mode
Revertive
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
WTR Time(s)
600
l
After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable
Working Board
5-IFH2-1
Protection Board
7-IFH2-1
In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5–8. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/ AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
14M
l
In this example, the spacing between radio links is 14 MHz.
l
This parameter needs to be set according to the values listed in service planning (microwave services).
E1 Capacity
6
A maximum of 6xE1 services can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity.
AM Mode
Asymmetric
An AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link.
AM Enable Status
Enable
The radio link uses the corresponding modulation mode according to the channel conditions.
Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
QPSK
l
In this example, the lowest modulation mode that the AM function supports is QPSK.
l
The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure the reliable transmission of E1 services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-21
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
32QAM
l
In this example, the highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM.
l
The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure that the maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be transmitted when the radio link is in good conditions.
NOTE
The 5-IFH2 and 7-IFH2 boards are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group. The 5-IFH2 functions as the main IF board and the 7-IFH2 functions as the standby IF board. The system automatically sets the relevant parameters of the standby board (7-IFH2). Hence, you need not set the parameters manually.
Step 5 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3.
Set the information about the 5-IFH2. Then, click Apply. Set the information about the 15ODU on the radio link. Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Link ID
101
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 101.
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled
-
TX Frequency (MHz)
14930.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of services. 4-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the crossconnections of the service. Click OK. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the crossconnections.
l
When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
Bidirectional
Source
4-PH1
In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6)
1-6
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
Sink
5-IFH2
In this example, the 5-IFH2 is the service sink.
Sink Port
1
In this example, port 1 is the service sink port.
Sink VC4
VC4-1
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-1.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-6
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l
Phone 1: 101
l
Orderwire Port: 5-IFH2-1
Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
5-IFH2-1(SDH)
In this example, the 5-IFH2-1(SDH) is the clock source.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-23
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
3.
Value Range
Description
7-IFH2-1(SDH)
In this example, the 7-IFH2-1(SDH) is the clock source.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Paramet er
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
5-IFH2-1 (SDH)
7-IFH2-1 (SDH)
Internal Clock Source
In this example, the 5-IFH2-1 (SDH), 7-IFH2-1(SDH), and internal clock source are set as the clock sources.
Clock Source Priority Sequence (1 is the highest)
1
2
3
l
This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source.
l
The priority level of the 5IFH2-1(SDH) clock source is 1. The priority level of the 7IFH2-1(SDH) clock source is 2. The priority level of the internal clock source is 3.
----End
4.2.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. The EMS6 board must be added. The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board.
4-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The user services use PORT1.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The user services use PORT1.
l
In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click Apply.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1–PORT4
l
The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
l
PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-25
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
3.
4.
4-26
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1–PORT4
l
The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
l
PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
l
In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1–PORT4
l
The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
l
PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
TAG
l
l
In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT1. In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT2– PORT4.
Description If TAG is set to Access: l
The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded.
l
The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received.
If TAG is set to Tag Aware: l
The packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
l
The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Default VLAN ID
300
In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300 for PORT1.
Entry Detection
Enabled
l
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Type
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the service source port.
Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)
300
The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the source service.
Sink Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-27
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
l
l
4-28
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
300
The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the sink service.
Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Type
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the service source port.
Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)
100
The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service.
Sink Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
100
The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.
Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Type
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the service source port.
Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)
200
The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service.
Sink Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
200
The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service.
Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board. 1.
Create the flow. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
c.
Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three flows. Then, click OK.
l
l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A1 as follows: Parameter
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT+VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow.
VLAN ID
300
In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300.
Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT+VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow.
VLAN ID
100
In this example, the source VLAN ID is 100.
Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT+VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-29
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
2.
Value Range
Description
VLAN ID
200
In this example, the source VLAN ID is 200.
Create the CAR. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the CAR Configuration tab.
c.
Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the two CARs. Then, click OK.
l
l
4-30
Parameter
Set the parameters of user A1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CAR ID
1
In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In this example, CAR1 is enabled.
Committed Information Rate(kbit/s)
10240
l
In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the CBS is 0.
Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)
20480
l
In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the MBS is 0.
Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
CAR ID
2
In this example, CAR 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In this example, CAR 2 is enabled.
Committed Information Rate(kbit/s)
20480
l
In this example, the CIR is 20480 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the CBS is 0.
Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)
40960
l
In this example, the PIR is 40960 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the MBS is 0.
Create the CoS. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
c.
Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three CoSs. Then, click OK..
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS ID
1
In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
simple
If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-31
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
l
l
4.
4-32
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS Priority
7
The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue.
Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS ID
2
In this example, CoS 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
simple
If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
CoS Priority
3
The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS ID
3
In this example, CoS 3 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
simple
If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
CoS Priority
2
The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
Bind the CAR/CoS. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Paramet er
Value Range
Port
PORT1
PORT2
Description PORT2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 are the source ports of the Ethernet services associated with the flows.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Paramet er
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT +VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
VLAN ID
300
100
200
The source VLAN IDs of the ports are 300, 100, and 200.
Bound CAR
1
-
2
The flow is bound with the corresponding CAR, according to the service plan.
Bound CoS
3
1
2
The flow is bound with the corresponding CoS, according to the service plan.
Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
LAG No.
1
In this example, LAG No. is set to 1.
LAG Name
LAG_1
In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1.
LAG Type
Manual
The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP is not enabled to add or delete a member port. The member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. The equipment determines whether to perform the aggregation according to the status of the specific port.
Load Sharing
Non-Sharing
Only one member link of a link aggregation group carries traffic and the other member links are in the Standby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme is provided.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
In the case of the LAG that worked with the 1+1 IF protection, the revertive mode must be set to NonRevertive.
Main Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the main port.
Selected Slave Ports
PORT4
In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-33
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
----End
4.2.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services) You can configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. All the required boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the NE ID. Set the parameters as follows: l
New ID: 102
l
New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE. Set the parameters as follows: l
IP: 129.9.0.102
Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection.
4-34
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
3.
Click New. Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Protection Group ID
1
If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the first protection group of the NE.
Working Mode
HSB
In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state after the WTR time (when the former working channel is restored to normal) expires.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
After the working path is restored to normal and the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching restoration occurs.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
When the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
600
WTR Time(s)
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable
Working Board
5-IFH2-1
Protection Board
7-IFH2-1
In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5–8. It is recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IFH2 and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
14M
l
In this example, the spacing between radio links is 14 MHz.
l
This parameter needs to be set according to the values listed in service planning (microwave services).
E1 Capacity
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
6
A maximum of 6xE1 services can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-35
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
AM Mode
Asymmetric
When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link.
AM Enable Status
Enable
The radio link uses the corresponding modulation mode according to the channel conditions.
Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
QPSK
l
In this example, the lowest modulation mode that the AM function supports is QPSK.
l
The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure the reliable transmission of E1 services.
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
32QAM
l
In this example, the highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM.
l
The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure that the maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be transmitted when the radio links are in good conditions.
NOTE
The 5-IFH2 and 7-IFH2 boards are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group. The 5-IFH2 functions as the main IF board and the 7-IFH2 functions as the standby IF board. The system automatically sets the relevant parameters of the standby board (7-IFH2). Hence, you need not set the parameters manually.
4-36
3.
In the NE Explorer, select the 8-IFH2 and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
4.
Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
14M
l
In this example, the spacing between radio links is 14 MHz.
l
This parameter needs to be set according to the values listed in service planning (microwave services).
E1 Capacity
4
A maximum of 4xE1 services can be transmitted in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity.
AM Mode
Asymmetric
When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AM switching in one direction of the radio link does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
AM Enable Status
Enable
l
When this parameter is set to Enable, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation mode according to the channel conditions.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
In this example, the lowest modulation mode that the AM function supports is QPSK.
l
The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure the reliable transmission of E1 services.
Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
QPSK
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
32QAM
In this example, the available highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM. l
In this example, the highest modulation mode that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM.
l
The value of this parameter is determined by the link capacity and must ensure that the maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be transmitted when the radio links are in good conditions.
Step 5 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3.
Set the information about the 5-IFH2 and 15-ODU on one radio link. Then, click Apply. Set the information about the 8-IFH2 and 18-ODU on the other radio link. Then, click Apply. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of the 5-IFH2 and 15-ODU as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Link ID
101
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 101.
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled
-
TX Frequency (MHz)
14510.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-37
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
l
Parameter
Value Range
Description
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Set the parameters of the 8-IFH2 and 18-ODU as follows: Parameter
Value Range
Description
Link ID
102
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio links between sites.
l
In this example, the radio link ID is 102.
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled
-
TX Frequency (MHz)
14532.0
The transmit frequency needs to be set according to the service planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
420.0
In this example, the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power (dBm)
10.0
The transmit power needs to be set according to the service planning.
TX Status
unmute
l
When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU receives and transmits microwave signals normally.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 6 Create the cross-connections of services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters. Then, click OK. l
4-38
Configure the cross-connections of the E1 services of NE1 and NE2 as follows.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
l
Bidirectional
Source
4-PH1
In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-6
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
Sink
5-IFH2
In this example, the 5-IFH2 is the service sink.
Sink Port
1
In this example, port 1 is the service sink port.
Sink VC4
VC4-1
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-1.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-6
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
Configure the cross-connections of the E1 services of NE2 and NE3 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Level
VC12
l
In this example, VC-12 data services are bound.
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Direction
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Bidirectional
Source
4-PH1
In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
7-10
In this example, the timeslots to which the service source corresponds are timeslots 7-10.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-39
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Sink
8-IFH2
In this example, the 8-IFH2 is the service sink.
Sink Port
1
In this example, port 1 is the service sink port.
Sink VC4
VC4-1
In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-1.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-4
In this example, the timeslots to which the service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-4.
Step 7 Configure the orderwire. Set the parameters as follows: l
Phone 1: 102
l
Orderwire Port: 5-IFH2-1
Step 8 Configure the clock source. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources. Then, click OK.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Clock Source
External Clock Source 1
In this example, external clock source 1 is selected as the clock source.
Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest). Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Clock Source
External Clock Source 1
Internal Clock Source
In this example, external clock source 1 and the internal clock source are selected as the clock sources.
Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest)
1
2
l
This parameter specifies the priority level of a clock source.
l
The priority level of external clock source 1 is 1. The priority level of the internal clock source is 2.
Description
----End
4-40
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
4.2.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board) You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE2 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. The EMS6 board must be added. The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply.
3.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The user services use PORT1.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The user services use PORT1.
l
In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-41
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
l
In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click Apply.
3.
4-42
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1–PORT4
l
The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
l
PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode
AutoNegotiation
In this example, the port works in autonegotiation mode.
Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1–PORT4
l
The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
l
PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
l
In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
l
In this example, the auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
NonAutonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Autonegotiatio n Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4.
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1–PORT4
l
The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l
The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the services of user B1 use PORT2.
l
PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
TAG
l
l
In this example, TAG is set to Access for PORT1. In this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT2– PORT4.
If TAG is set to Access: l
The packets that carry VLAN tags are discarded.
l
The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then received.
If TAG is set to Tag Aware: l
The packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
l
The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Default VLAN ID
300
In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300 for PORT1.
Entry Detection
Enabled
l
In this example, the incoming packets from the port need to be checked according to the tag attributes.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK. l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Type
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-43
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
l
l
4-44
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the service source port.
Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)
300
The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the source service.
Sink Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
300
The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the sink service.
Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Type
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the service source port.
Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)
100
The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the source service.
Sink Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
100
The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is the sink service.
Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows: Parameter
Value Range
Description
Service Type
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
l
If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the services from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source are created.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Source Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the service source port.
Source CVLAN(e.g.1, 3-6)
200
The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the source service.
Sink Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1, 3-6)
200
The service that has the VLAN ID of 200 is the sink service.
Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board. 1.
Create the flow. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
c.
Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the eight flows. Then, click OK.
l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A2 as follows: Parameter
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT+VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
Port
PORT1
In this example, PORT1 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow.
VLAN ID
300
In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300.
Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT+VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-45
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
l
2.
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow.
VLAN ID
100
In this example, the source VLAN ID is 100.
Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Flow Type
PORT+VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
Port
PORT2
In this example, PORT2 is the source port of the Ethernet service associated with the flow.
VLAN ID
200
In this example, the source VLAN ID is 200.
Create the CAR. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the CAR Configuration tab.
c.
Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the two CARs. Then, click OK.
l
4-46
Parameter
Set the parameters of user A1 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CAR ID
1
In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In this example, CAR 1 is enabled.
Committed Information Rate(kbit/s)
10240
l
In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the CBS is 0.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)
20480
l
In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the MBS is 0.
Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CAR ID
2
In this example, CAR 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/ Disabled
Enabled
In this example, CAR 2 is enabled.
Committed Information Rate(kbit/s)
20480
l
In this example, the CIR is 20480 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the CBS is 0.
Peak Information Rate(kbit/s)
40960
l
In this example, the PIR is 40960 kbit/s.
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
0
In this example, the MBS is 0.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-47
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
3.
Create the CoS. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
c.
Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three CoSs. Then, click OK.
l
l
l
4-48
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS ID
1
In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
simple
If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
CoS Priority
7
The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue.
Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS ID
2
In this example, CoS 2 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
simple
If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
CoS Priority
3
The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A2 as follows. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS ID
3
In this example, CoS 3 is used to bind the flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
simple
If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
CoS Priority
2
The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4.
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Bind the CAR/CoS. a.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b.
Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Paramet er
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
PORT2
PORT2
In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 are the source ports of the Ethernet services associated with the flows.
Flow Type
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
PORT +VLAN Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT +VLAN Flow, the packets that are from the same port and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
VLAN ID
300
100
200
The source VLAN IDs of the ports are 300, 100, and 200.
Bound CAR
1
-
2
The flow is bound with the corresponding CAR, according to the service plan.
Bound CoS
3
1
2
The flow is bound with the corresponding CoS, according to the service plan.
Step 5 Create a LAG of the EMS6 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter
Value Range
Description
LAG No.
1
In this example, LAG No. is set to 1.
LAG Name
LAG_1
In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1.
LAG Type
Manual
The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP is not enabled to add or delete a member port. The member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. The equipment determines whether to perform the aggregation according to the status of the specific port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-49
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Load Sharing
Non-Sharing
Only one member link of a link aggregation group carries traffic and the other member links are in the Standby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme is provided.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
In the case of the LAG that worked with the 1+1 IF protection, the revertive mode must be set to NonRevertive.
Main Port
PORT3
In this example, PORT3 is the main port.
Selected Slave Ports
PORT4
In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.
----End
4.2.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board) You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board normally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. You must be logged in to the NE. The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
2.
Set the basic attributes of the ports. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Port
PORT1
l
The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l
The user services use PORT1.
Enabled/ Disabled
4-50
Enabled
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
In this example, the port works in auto-negotiation mode.
NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled
l
In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow control is disabled.
l
In this example, this parameter adopts the default value.
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Enable Symmetric Flow Control
When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, PORT1 transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
Step 2 Configure the CoS of the IFH2 board. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3.
Set CoS Parameter and CoS Priority. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
CoS Parameter
Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag
Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag
The data flows correspond to Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag and Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag, respectively.
CoS Priority
3
1
l
The data flow of Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 3. The data flow of Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 1.
l
This parameter specifies the queue to which a packet should be scheduled.
----End
4.2.10 Configuring NE3 You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS. NE3 is the OptiX RTN 600 NE that uses the IDU 605 1F. The procedure for configuring an NE that uses the IDU 605 is not provided in this document. For details, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 605 Configuration Guide.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-51
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
5
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
About This Chapter When the IDU 610 or IDU 620 has the SDH/PDH microwave service only in one direction, you can use the quick configuration wizard to perform the initial service configuration. Hence, the process of configuring the services on a single microwave NE is simplified. 5.1 Purpose The quick configuration wizard can be used to set the general parameters that are used in multiple configuration tasks. Hence, the quick configuration wizard can realize the configuration of all the basic data at one time. 5.2 Using the Quick Configuration Wizard The quick configuration wizard helps you to complete the configuration of the basic service data step by step.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
5.1 Purpose The quick configuration wizard can be used to set the general parameters that are used in multiple configuration tasks. Hence, the quick configuration wizard can realize the configuration of all the basic data at one time. Table 5-1 Purpose of the quick configuration Integrated Configuration Task
Configurable Parameter
Remarks
Configuring logical boards
Adding all the logical boards that correspond to the physical boards of the NE
–
Configuring the IF 1+1 protection
l
Protection scheme
l
Working board
l
Protection board
Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
Work mode
l
Link ID
l
TX frequency (kHz)
l
T/R spacing (kHz)
l
TX power (dBm)
This task is optional when the NE is configured with two SDH or PDH IF boards.
l
The corresponding user interface of the Web LCT is suppressed when the NE is configured with only one SDH or PDH IF board.
This task is applicable to the SDH/PDH microwave in one direction.
Configuring PDH services (NE configuration)
Cross-connections between the E1 ports and the SDH/ PDH IF boards
This task is applicable when the NE is configured with the SDH/PDH microwave services only in one direction and the service boards contain only one tributary board.
Configuring the clock
One of the following configurations is adopted:
When three levels of clock sources are configured, you can set the available clock sources according to the actual requirements. In this case, however, the internal clock source cannot be selected.
Configuring the orderwire 5-2
l
l
l
The clock sources are not configured. In this case, the clock works in the free-run mode.
l
Three levels of clock sources are configured, that is, there are three levels of clock sources.
Orderwire phone number
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
– Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
Integrated Configuration Task
Configurable Parameter
Remarks
Enabling the NE performance monitoring function
Setting the NE performance monitoring function
This task is performed to enable the 15-minute and 24hour performance monitoring functions.
Synchronizing the NE time
Synchronizing the NE time
This task is performed to synchronize the NEs with the current time of the NM server.
5.2 Using the Quick Configuration Wizard The quick configuration wizard helps you to complete the configuration of the basic service data step by step.
Prerequisite l
The NE must be configured with only the SDH/PDH microwave services in one direction.
l
The RF system must be configured with the 1+1 protection or the 1+0 non-protection.
l
All the required boards must be installed correctly.
l
The service boards of the NE must contain only one E1 interface board.
l
The ODU must be installed correctly and the power supply must be normal.
l
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Background Information All the basic NE data can be configured at one time by using the quick configuration wizard, only when all the prerequisites are met. Otherwise, only partial configurations are complete and hence you need to perform the remaining configurations again.
Precautions
CAUTION l
When the quick configuration wizard is used, the original NE configurations are cleared. As a result, the services are interrupted.
l
All the data configurations that are performed by the quick configuration wizard can be realized by using the general configuration mode. This topic describes only the parameters that are set in the quick configuration wizard. For other parameters, see 2 Configuring SDH/ PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Quick Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Ensure that the NE equipment meets the requirements specified in the prompt, and click Start Config.
Step 3 Click Next in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Ensure that NE Panel is correct and click Next. Click Next. If two or more IF boards are configured, proceed to Step 5; otherwise proceed to Step 6.
5-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
Step 5 Optional: Set the IF protection parameters, and click Next. l
If Configure Intermediate Frequency 1+1 Protection is selected, proceed to Step 6; otherwise, proceed to Step 8.
l
If Configure Intermediate Frequency 1+1 Protection is not selected, it indicates that multidirectional radio links need to be configured and that the IF and RF data of the radio link in each direction must be configured in the general mode. NOTE
The 18)2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Step 6 Optional: Configure the IF parameters and RF parameters, and click Next. NOTE
If Protection Mode is set to FD in Step 5, select the standby board from the IF Board drop-down list > and then configure Transmission Frequency(KHz) for the standby board.
Step 7 Optional: Select the E1 port and click Next.
5-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
NOTE
The services of the selected port are mapped in sequence from the first VC-12 in the radio frame. For example, even if the selected ports are 4-PH1-1, 4-PH1-3, 4-PH1-5, and 4-PH1-7, the services are mapped in sequence from the first VC-12 to the fourth VC-12 in the radio frame.
Step 8 Set the clock parameters and orderwire parameters. Click Next.
Step 9 Click Next. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Step 10 Ensure that Configure Reports is consistent with the engineering plan, and then click Next.
The Web LCT starts to issue the configurations. Step 11 Click Finish after all the configurations are delivered.
5-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
6
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
About This Chapter OptiX RTN 600 provide various auxiliary interfaces to meet the requirements in special application scenarios. The auxiliary interfaces are mainly used for accessing synchronous data services, asynchronous data services, and external alarms. 6.1 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data service requirements. 6.2 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point asynchronous data service requirements. 6.3 Configuration Example (External Alarms) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
6.1 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data service requirements. 6.1.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 6.1.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs. 6.1.3 Configuration Process You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
6.1.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 6-1, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: the data communication equipment between NE1 and NE3 must communicate with each other, and the required bandwidth must be 64 kbit/s. Figure 6-1 Networking diagram NE 1
64kbit/s
NE 2
NE 3
64kbit/s
6.1.2 Service Planning According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for configuring the NEs.
6-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
Board Configuration Information The SCC boards of NE1 and NE3 need to provide the F1 synchronous data ports. In the case of the OptiX RTN 600, the SL61SCC VER.C provides the F1 synchronous data port whereas the SL61SCC VER.B does not provide the F1 synchronous data port.
Configuring the Synchronous Data Port Table 6-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Data Channel 1
6-SL1
5-IF1A
5-IF1A
Data Channel 2
F1
6-SL1
F1
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 6-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services Station Timeslot
NE2
NE1 6-SL1-1
NE3
6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 F1
2-SCC: F1
5-IF1A-1 F1 2-SCC: F1
Add/Frop Forward
l
The F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add/drop the synchronous data services.
l
The F1 overhead byte on the SDH line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.
l
The F1 overhead byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.
l
The synchronous data services are passed through between the SL1 board in slot 6 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2.
6.1.3 Configuration Process You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite l
All the required boards must be added.
l
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Procedure Step 1 Log in to NE1. Step 2 Configure the synchronous data services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the F1 Data Port tab.
3.
Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Data Channel 1
6-SL1-1
When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used.
Data Channel 2
F1
When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port complies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/ s.
Step 3 Log in to NE2. Step 4 Configure the synchronous data services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the F1 Data Port tab.
3.
Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Data Channel 1
6-SL1-1
When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used.
Data Channel 2
5-IF1A-1
When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the selfdefined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
Step 5 Log in to NE3. Step 6 Configure the synchronous data services.
6-4
1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the F1 Data Port tab.
3.
Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then, click Apply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
Parameter
Value Range
Description
Data Channel 1
5-IF1A-1
When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the selfdefined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
Data Channel 2
F1
When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port complies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/ s.
----End
6.2 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point asynchronous data service requirements. 6.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. 6.2.2 Service Planning The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the networking diagram. 6.2.3 Configuration Process You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
6.2.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example, the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements. As shown in Figure 6-3, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU 620. Asynchronous data services need to be activated between NE1 and NE3. The service requirements are as follows: l
NE1 must be connected to the monitor server.
l
NE3 must be connected to the environment monitor.
l
Point-to-point communication must exist between the monitor server and the environment monitor, through services at the asynchronous data ports.
l
The requirements for the environment monitor are as follows:
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
–
The level of the port must be RS-232. Logic "1" stands for –5 V to –15 V, and logic "0" stands for +5 V to +15 V.
–
When no data is transmitted, the port must be of high RS-232 level (about –9 V).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Figure 6-3 Networking diagram NE 2
NE 1
NE 3
RS-232
RS-232
6.2.2 Service Planning The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the networking diagram.
Configuration of the Asynchronous Data Services Table 6-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
SERIAL1
Broadcast Data Source
6-SL1-1
5-IF1A-1
5-IF1A-1
Broadcast Data Sink
S1
6-SL1-1
S1
Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 6-4 Timeslot allocation diagram Station Timeslot
NE3
NE2
NE1 6-SL1-1
6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 Serial1
2-SCC: S1
5-IF1A-1 Serial1 2-SCC: S1
Add/Frop Forward
As shown in the timeslot allocation diagram, the asynchronous data services are as follows:
6-6
l
The S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE3 are used to add and drop the asynchronous data services.
l
The SERIAL1 overhead byte on the SDH optical line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
l
The self-defined SERIAL byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l
The asynchronous data services are passed through between port 1 of the SL1 board in slot 6 and port 1 of the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2.
6.2.3 Configuration Process You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite l
All the required boards must be added.
l
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Log in to NE1. Step 2 Configure the asynchronous data services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1
l
In this example, Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1.
l
In the case of a radio link, a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l
In this example, Broadcast Data Source is set to 6-SL1-1.
l
When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/ electrical line port, Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l
In this example, Broadcast Data Sink is set to S1.
l
When this parameter is set so that it is the same as Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used.
Broadcast Data Source
Selected Broadcast Data Sink
6-SL1-1
S1
Step 3 Log in to NE2. Step 4 Configure the asynchronous data services. 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
2.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1
l
In this example, Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1.
l
In the case of a radio link, a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l
In this example, Broadcast Data Source is set to 6-SL1-1.
l
When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/ electrical line port, Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l
In this example, Selected Broadcast Data Sink is set to 5-IF1A-1.
l
When this parameter is set to IF port, the selfdefined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
Broadcast Data Source
Selected Broadcast Data Sink
6-SL1-1
5-IF1A-1
Step 5 Log in to NE3. Step 6 Configure the asynchronous data services. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Parameter
Value Range
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1
l
In this example, Overhead Byte is set to SERIAL1.
l
In the case of a radio link, a self-defined SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l
In this example, Broadcast Data Source is set to 5-IF1A-1.
l
When this parameter is set to IF port, the selfdefined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
l
In this example, Selected Broadcast Data Sink is set to S1.
l
When this parameter is set so that it is the same as Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used.
Broadcast Data Source
Selected Broadcast Data Sink
6-8
5-IF1A-1
S1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
----End
6.3 Configuration Example (External Alarms) This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements. 6.3.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes the external alarm requirements. 6.3.2 Service Planning The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking diagram. 6.3.3 Configuration Process You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
6.3.1 Networking Diagram The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes the external alarm requirements. An OptiX RTN 600 NE must meet the following external alarm requirements: l
Outputs two external alarms, and reports a critical alarm and a major alarm. The alarm modes are the same, that is, the port enters the "off" state when an alarm is generated.
l
Inputs three external alarms. The alarm modes are the same, that is, an alarm is generated when the port enters the "on" state.
Figure 6-5 Networking diagram Alarm In1 Alarm In2 Alarm In3 Alarm Out1 Alarm Out2
6.3.2 Service Planning The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking diagram.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-9
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Table 6-3 Configuration of the external alarms Port No.
Alarm Mode
Alarm Trigger Condition
Alarm output port 1
Relay Turns Off/High Level
Automatically Triggered by Critical Alarms
Alarm output port 2
Relay Turns Off/High Level
Automatically Triggered by Major Alarms
Alarm input port 1
Relay Turns On/Low Level
-
Alarm input port 2
Relay Turns On/Low Level
-
Alarm input port 3
Relay Turns On/Low Level
-
6.3.3 Configuration Process You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the NE. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Configure external alarms. 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EOW board and then choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Configure the input alarm. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
3.
6-10
Paramet er
Value Range
Using Status
Used
In this example, Using Status of the alarm interface is set to Used.
Alarm Mode
Relay Turns On/Low Level
The alarm is generated when the relay is on.
EOW-1
EOW-2
Description EOW-3
Configure the output alarm. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces
Value Range EOW-1
Description EOW-2
Use or Not
Used
In this example, Use or Not of the alarm interface is set to Used.
Working Mode
Automatic
Changing the status of the output relay according to Alarm Trigger Conditions and Alarm Mode.
Alarm Trigger Conditions
Automaticall y Triggered by Critical Alarms
Alarm Mode
Relay Turns Off/High Level
Automaticall y Triggered by Major Alarms
The status of the output relay is changed automatically according to the preset value. The alarm is generated when the relay is off.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-11
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7
7 Checking the Configuration
Checking the Configuration
About This Chapter After the initial configuration is complete, you need to check whether the configuration is correct. If the configuration is incorrect, you need to analyze the cause and rectify the fault. 7.1 Checking the NE Configuration The following NE configuration items must be checked: NE status, software version, clock source, 1+1 protection, SNCP, alarms, abnormal performance events, and ECC routing. 7.2 Checking the Radio Link The following items of the radio link need be checked: XPIC configuration, N+1 protection, IF 1+1 protection, Hybrid/AM attribute, IF configuration, and ODU configuration.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
7.1 Checking the NE Configuration The following NE configuration items must be checked: NE status, software version, clock source, 1+1 protection, SNCP, alarms, abnormal performance events, and ECC routing. NOTE
l
Before you check the NE configuration, you need select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
l
The "operation directory" in the checklist refers to the operation directory in the Function Tree in the NE Explorer.
Table 7-1 NE status checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
NE attributes
Configuration > NE Attribute
l
The NE ID must comply with the plan, and the IDs across the entire network must be unique.
l
The gateway NE IP address must be the same as planned.
2
NE IP
Communication > Communication Parameter
l
The NE IP address must be the same as planned.
3
NE time
Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
l
The time difference between each NE and the NM system in a network need be within five minutes.
l
The mode for synchronizing the NE time must comply with the planning.
l
The physical board and logical board must be the same.
l
The board position is the same as planned.
l
All the boards must be in-service.
l
Users of different levels must be configured with different authority levels.
l
Different NE users must be created in case of multiple NM systems.
4
5
7-2
Logical slot
NE security
Report > Board Information Report > Slot Information Report
Security > NE User Management
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
Table 7-2 Software version checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
Software version
Report > Board Information Report
l
The software version must comply with the networking requirements.
l
The software version and BIOS version must comply with the corresponding version mapping table.
Table 7-3 Clock checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
Clock source priority
Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority List
l
The clock source priority must be the same as planned.
2
Clock source switching
Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching
l
Parameters in the Clock Source Switching Parameter tab must be the same as planned.
l
Parameters in the Clock Source Switching Condition tab must be the same as planned.
l
The switching status in the Clock Source Switching tab must be the same as the actual status. Normally, the current switching source should be the first clock source.
3
Clock subnet
Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Settings
The clock source ID and the clock subnet number under Clock Subnet are the same as planned.
Table 7-4 1+1 protection checklist
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
Board 1+1 protection
Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection
l
The main board and the standby board must be in the proper state.
l
The working board must be in the same state as the equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
Table 7-5 Cross-connection and SNCP checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
Crossconnection
Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration
l
The SNCP service cross-connection must be correctly configured.
l
Common service cross-connection must be correctly configured.
l
Revertive Mod, WTR Time, and Hold-off Time must be the same as planned.
l
Active Channel and Switching Request must be normal.
2
SNCP service control
Configuration > SNCP Service Control
Table 7-6 Alarm and abnormal event checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
Alarms
Alarm > Browse Alarms
l
There must be rational reasons for the alarms.
l
The causes of the abnormal cases in the alarm history must be detected.
l
There must be rational reasons for all the abnormal events.
2
Abnormal events
Alarm > Browse Abnormal Events
Table 7-7 ECC routing checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
ECC routing
Communication > NE ECC Link Management
l
All the NEs must be connected by the ECC.
l
Normally, the ECC should be the shortest route.
l
The automatic mode should not be used if the network runs normally.
l
No hub or switch should be shared with third-party equipment to extend the ECC.
2
7-4
Extended ECC
Configuration > ECC Management
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
7.2 Checking the Radio Link The following items of the radio link need be checked: XPIC configuration, N+1 protection, IF 1+1 protection, Hybrid/AM attribute, IF configuration, and ODU configuration. NOTE
l
Before you check the XPIC configuration, N+1 protection, IF 1+1 protection, you need to select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
l
Before you check the configuration of the IF and the ODU, you need select the board to be checked from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Before you check the Hybrid/AM attribute, and IF/ODU configuration, you need to select the board to be checked from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
l
The "operation directory" in the checklist refers to the operation directory in the Function Tree in the NE Explorer.
Table 7-8 XPIC checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
XPIC workgroup
Configuration > Link Configuration > XPIC
l
The boards in each polarization direction must be the same as planned.
l
The ID of the link in each polarization direction must be the same as planned.
Table 7-9 N+1 protection checklist
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
N+1 protection
Configuration > Link Configuration > N+1 Protection
l
Each working unit must be the same as planned.
l
Each protection unit must be the same as planned.
l
The switched status of each unit must be "normal".
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
Table 7-10 IF 1+1 protection checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
IF 1+1 protection
Configuration > Link Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection
l
The working mode must be the same as planned.
l
The revertive mode must be the same as planned.
l
The WTR time must be the same as planned. Normally, the WTR time is 600s.
l
The reverse switching enabled attribute must be the same as planned.
Table 7-11 Hybrid/AM attribute checklist
7-6
No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
Hybrid/ AM attribute
Configuration > Hybrid/ AM Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration
l
The IF bandwidth must be the same as planned.
l
The E1 capacity in the Hybrid microwave must be the same as planned.
l
AM Enable Status must be set correctly.
l
AM Mode must be set correctly.
l
Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity must be the same as planned.
l
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be the same as planned.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
Table 7-12 IF configuration checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
IF attributes
Configuration > IF Interface > IF Attributes
l
The IF working mode must be the same as planned.
l
The radio Link ID must be the same as planned.
l
The wayside service enable status must be the same as planned. The wayside service is available only when the radio working mode is mode 7 (that is, STM-1 mode) and the input/ output of the external clock is in the bits mode.
2
ATPC functions
Configuration > IF Interface > ATPC Attributes
l
The ATPC enable status must be the same as planned.
l
When ATPC is enabled, the ATPC thresholds and step must be the same as planned.
Table 7-13 ODU configuration checklist No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
1
ODU RF attributes
Configuration > ODU Interface > Radio Frequency Attributes
l
The working frequency range, transmit frequency, and T/R spacing must be the same as planned.
2
ODU power attributes
Configuration > ODU Interface > Power Attributes
l
The transmit power range and the actual transmit power must be the same as planned.
l
The actual received power must comply with the requirement of the planning.
l
The station type (that is, Tx low or Tx high) must be the same as planned.
l
The frequency band of the ODU must be the same as planned.
l
The T/R spacing of the ODU must be the same as planned.
3
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
ODU equipment informatio n
Configuration > ODU Interface > Equipment Information
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-7
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
7 Checking the Configuration
7-8
No .
Item
Operation Directory
Criteria
4
ODU advanced attributes
Configuration > ODU Interface > Advanced Attributes
l
After the NE commissioning is complete, Configure Transmission Status should be unmute.
l
After the NE commissioning is complete, Actual Transmission Status of the ODU that is not configured with IF 1+1 protection or the main ODU that is configured with IF 1+1 protection should be unmute.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
8
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
About This Chapter During the equipment commissioning and operating phases, you need to add certain configuration and modify certain configuration data according to the actual requirements. 8.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services) The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks for configuring the NE attributes, radio link, services, clock, and orderwire. 8.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernet services.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
8.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services) The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks for configuring the NE attributes, radio link, services, clock, and orderwire.
NE Attributes Table 8-1 Task collection (NE attributes) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Creating NEs
To implement the centralized management of NEs by using the NMS, all the NEs that need to be managed must be added into the NE list.
Creating an NE (searching for the NE) or creating an NE manually
l
Generally, NEs are created by searching for the NE on the NMS.
l
The manual NE creation method is applicable only when several NEs need to be created on a large microwave network.
Modifying the NE ID
You need to modify an NE ID, if the NE ID does not meet the network planning requirements, for example, if the NE ID is the same as another NE ID.
Modifying the NE ID
-
Modifying the IP address of an NE
You need to modify the IP address of the gateway NE if changes occur in the external DCN between the NMS server and the gateway NE.
Changing the IP address of an NE
-
Synchronizing the NE time
After you conduct the settings on the NMS, the NE time is synchronized automatically and periodically. You can also synchronize the NE time manually if the NE time is lost due to NE faults.
Synchronizing the NE time
To ensure that the NE time can be synchronized correctly, the time, time domain, and DST of the NMS server must be set correctly.
8-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Radio Link
CAUTION When you add or modify the configurations of a radio link, you need to modify the configurations of the NE that is located far from the NMS server and then modify the configurations of the NE that is located near to the NMS server.
Table 8-2 Task collection (radio link) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Changing the radio work mode of the SDH/PDH radio link
You need to modify the radio work mode of an SDH/PDH radio link, if the SDH/PDH radio link does not meet the service capacity requirements.
1. Deleting the crossconnections of services
l
Before you change the radio work mode, you need to delete all the services on the IF ports.
l
If the IF ports are configured with relevant protection, you need to delete the protection first.
2. Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
Before you change a radio work mode, it is recommended that you consult the network planning department to check whether the radio link supports the new radio work mode.
Configuring the ATPC function
The ATPC function needs to be enabled for the radio link or the values of ATPC parameters need to be changed.
Configuring the ATPC function
-
Changing the transmit power
You can change the transmit power if the fading margin is insufficient but the transmit power can still be increased.
Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
-
Upgrading a 1+0 radio link to a 1+1 HSB/SD/FD radio link
To improve the reliability of a 1+0 radio link, you can upgrade the 1+0 radio link to a 1+1 HSB/SD/FD radio link.
1.Configuring IF 1+1 protection
In the case of IF 1+1 protection, the existing IF board functions as the main IF board. Configuring IF 1+1 protection does not interrupt services.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Task
Setting the Hybrid/ AM attribute
8-4
Application Scenario
If the Hybrid/AM attribute of the existing Hybrid radio link does not meet the service requirements, for example, if the modulation mode of the assured AM capacity needs to be changed to increase the assured capacity, you need to modify the Hybrid/AM attribute.
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Configuration Operation
Remarks
2.Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
l
Ensure that Actual TX Status of the standby ODU is unmute.
l
In the case of a 1+1 FD radio link, you need to set Transmission Frequency, T/R Spacing, and Transmit Power for the standby ODU.
l
Before you modify the Hybrid/AM attribute, it is recommended that you consult the network planning department to check whether the radio link supports the new modulation mode of the assured AM capacity and modulation mode of the full AM capacity.
l
Changing the Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity or Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity does not interrupt services.
l
To change E1 Capacity of the Hybrid Network, however, you need to delete all the E1 services on the IF ports.
Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Services Table 8-3 Task collection (services) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Adding SDH/PDH services
More SDH/PDH services need to be accessed on the network.
Creating the crossconnections of point-to-point services or creating the crossconnections of SNCP services
l
If the services that need to be added on the IF boards require the support of a license, you need to apply for the corresponding license.
l
If the services that are added on the SDH/PDH IF boards exceed the maximum capacity supported by the radio work mode, you need to change the radio work mode.
l
If the services that are added on the SDH/PDH IF boards exceed the maximum access capacity supported by the Hybrid microwave, you need to change the Hybrid/AM attribute.
Deleting SDH/ PDH services
If the line resources are insufficient, you need to delete the SDH/PDH services that are not used to release the corresponding resources.
Deleting the crossconnections of services
-
Upgrading an unprotected chain to a linear MSP chain
You can upgrade an unprotected chain to a linear MSP chain to improve the service reliability.
Configuring linear MSP
In the case of linear MSP, the existing line port functions as the working port. Configuring linear MSP does not interrupt the existing services.
Upgrading an unprotected ring to a two-fiber MSP ring
You can upgrade an unprotected ring to a twofiber MSP ring to improve the service reliability.
Configuring ring MSP
In the case of ring MSP. the existing line port functions as the working port. Configuring ring MSP does not interrupt the existing services.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Upgrading normal services to SNCP services
You can upgrade normal services to SNCP services to improve the service reliability.
Converting normal services to SNCP services
Only the normal services in the receive direction are converted to SNCP services. Hence, you need to configure the unidirectional crossconnections from the SNCP services to the working trail and from the SNCP services to the protection trail so that the normal services both in the receive direction and in the transmission direction are converted to SNCP services.
Clock Table 8-4 Task collection (clock) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Configuring the clock source
When the centralized management of the OptiX RTN NEs is implemented by using the NMS, configure the clock source for each NE according to the clock synchronization scheme.
Configuring the clock source
The clock sources must comply with the networkwide clock synchronization scheme. Hence, all the NEs on the transport network trace the same clock.
Configuring protection for the clock source
If the transport network is a ring network or a network with a more complex topology, configure the SSM or extended SSM protocol according to the requirements.
Configuring protection for the clock source
Generally, the requirements can be met after the SSM protocol is configured.
8-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Orderwire Table 8-5 Task collection (orderwire) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Configuring the orderwire
After the centralized management of the OptiX RTN NEs is implemented by using the NMS, configure the orderwire for the NEs.
Configuring the orderwire
l
The orderwire phone numbers of all the NEs on the network must of the same length. It is recommended that the orderwire phone numbers are three-digit numbers.
l
Each orderwire phone number must be unique and cannot be set to "888". It is recommended that you allocate the three-digit numbers (that start from "101") as the orderwire phone numbers for the NEs one after another, according to the order of NE IDs.
8.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services) This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernet services.
Ethernet Services Transmitted on the SDH Microwave Table 8-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Creating Ethernet services
Create the Ethernet services according to the service planning.
Configuring SDH/PDH microwavebased Ethernet services
-
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Increasing the line bandwidth of the Ethernet services
You need to increase the line bandwidth for Ethernet services, if the Ethernet traffic volume is increased.
1.Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Create the crossconnections from the idle timeslots of the Ethernet board to the line timeslots. Only the idle timeslots that can be added to the VCTRUNKs occupied by the Ethernet services can be crossconnected to the line timeslots.
2.Increasing or decreasing the VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically
Add the selected idle timeslots of the Ethernet board to the VCTRUNK. If the LCAS function is enabled for the VCTRUNK, adding the idle timeslots does not interrupt the Ethernet services.
1.Deleting Ethernet private line services or deleting Ethernet LAN services
-
2.Increasing or decreasing the VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically
If the VCTRUNK bandwidth cannot be used or less VCTRUNK bandwidth can be used after the services are deleted, delete partial or all timeslots contained in the VCTRUNK.
3.Deleting the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Delete the crossconnections of the timeslots in the VCTRUNK that are released in Step 2, to release the corresponding line resources.
Deleting Ethernet services
8-8
You can delete the Ethernet services that are not used to release the corresponding resources.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Task
Decreasing the line bandwidth of the Ethernet services
Application Scenario
If the Ethernet traffic volume is decreased, you can decrease the line bandwidth occupied by the Ethernet services to release the corresponding line resources.
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Configuration Operation
Remarks
4.Configuring the external ports of Ethernet boards
If the Ethernet port cannot be used after the services are deleted, set Enabled/Disabled to Disabled for the Ethernet port, thus preventing the alarms related to the port from being reported.
1.Decreasing or decreasing the VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically
Delete partial timeslots contained in the VCTRUNK.
2.Deleting the cross-connections of Ethernet services
Delete the crossconnections of the timeslots in the VCTRUNK that are released in Step 2, to release the corresponding line resources.
Ethernet Services Transmitted on the Hybrid Microwave Table 8-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave) Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Creating Ethernet services
Create the Ethernet services according to the service planning.
1. Creating the Ethernet services to be accessed through the EMS6 board or creating the Ethernet services to be accessed through the IFH2 board
-
Delete the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board.
You can delete the Ethernet services that are not used to release the corresponding resources.
1.Deleting Ethernet private line services or deleting Ethernet LAN services
-
2.Changing the values of CAR parameters or changing the values of CoS parameters
Change the values of QoS parameters to ensure that the QoS control adapts to the service adjustments.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-9
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Task
Application Scenario
Configuration Operation
Remarks
Adjusting the QoS
You need to adjust the QoS if the service type, traffic volume, or Ethernet capacity supported by the Hybrid microwave is changed.
1.Changing the values of CAR parameters or changing the values of CoS parameters
Change the values of QoS parameters to ensure that the QoS controls the situation of the change.
8-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9
9 Configuration Task Collection
Configuration Task Collection
About This Chapter The configuration task collection includes all the common configuration tasks. 9.1 Managing NEs Before you configure the NEs, ensure that all the NEs can be managed properly. 9.2 Configuring Radio Links Configuring a radio link involves configuring the IF/ODU information of the radio link and the microwave features such as the XPIC, IF 1+1 protection, IF N+1 protection, and AM. 9.3 Configuring MSP The MSP includes the ring MSP and linear MSP. 9.4 Configuring SDH/PDH Services (NE Configuration) The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services according to the cross-connection mode. 9.5 Configuring the Clock This topic describes how to configure the clock. In a digital transmission network, all the transmission nodes must be synchronized. Otherwise, buffer overflow or exhaustion of the signal bits generated at the transmission nodes causes sliding damage to the digital flow, thus resulting in data errors. To ensure time synchronization, configure the clock for each NE. In the case of a complex network, configure clock protection at the same time. 9.6 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes how to configure the orderwire, synchronous data services, asynchronous data services, and external alarms. 9.7 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values of the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the parameters of the ports need to be modified. 9.8 Configuring Overhead Bytes This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9 Configuration Task Collection
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9.9 Adjusting the Alarm Management Function This section describes how to adjust the alarm management function of a board or port according to the service availability, thus improving the alarm monitoring efficiency. 9.10 Enabling/Disabling the Monitoring of the NE Performance The NE performance monitoring function is enabled by default. You can disable and then enable the NE performance monitoring function manually. 9.11 Configuring Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The external Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internal Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH. 9.12 Creating Ethernet Services The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private line services and Ethernet LAN services. 9.13 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services In the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. 9.14 Configuring the QoS The QoS provides differentiated services. Hence, you can configure the QoS to ensure the quality of the Ethernet services. 9.15 Creating a LAG Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection. 9.16 LPT Configuration When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT port and the related information. 9.17 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature You can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to the actual service requirements. 9.18 Configuring the Service Access of NEs You can ensure the security of a network by setting the service access of the NEs on the network.
9-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.1 Managing NEs Before you configure the NEs, ensure that all the NEs can be managed properly. 9.1.1 Creating an NE (Searching for the NE) To manage NEs, you must first create NEs on the Web LCT. This topic describes how to create an NE by searching for the NE, and then adding the NE. 9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually To manage an NE, you need to create the NE on the NMS first. This topic describes how to create an NE manually. 9.1.3 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE. 9.1.4 Modifying the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. The modification does not affect services. 9.1.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE After modifying the NE ID, you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineering planning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services, but modifying the IP address of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs. 9.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards If the corresponding logical board is not added in the slot layout diagram, add the logical board. If the added logical board mismatches with the physical board, delete the logical board and add the correct logical board. 9.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the NM time, you can record the exact time when alarms and performance events occur. 9.1.8 Localizing the NE Time When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to localize the NE time to synchronize the NE with the local time.
9.1.1 Creating an NE (Searching for the NE) To manage NEs, you must first create NEs on the Web LCT. This topic describes how to create an NE by searching for the NE, and then adding the NE.
Prerequisite The NE must be connected to the computer that is installed with the Web LCT. The network communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal.
Context You can create an NE by searching for the NE and the adding the NE on the Web LCT. In addition, you can create an NE by adding the NE manually. Generally, the NE ID is not known during the initial NE configuration. Hence, the searching method is used to create an NE in most cases. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, click NE Search. Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Optional: Set Domain to 129.9.255.255, and click Search. NOTE
During the initial configuration, the domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. When the gateway NE IP address of the searched NE is changed, you need to change the domain.
Step 3 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.
Step 4 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE. The prompt box is displayed indicating that the NE is successfully added. Step 5 Click OK. A new NE is added to the NE list.
Step 6 Click Cancel in the Search NE dialog box. ----End
9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually To manage an NE, you need to create the NE on the NMS first. This topic describes how to create an NE manually.
Prerequisite The NE must access the computer on which the Web LCT is installed. 9-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
The communication between the Web LCT and the NEs must be normal. The NE ID must be known.
Context You can create an NE by adding the NE manually. In addition, you can create an NE by searching for the NE. If the NE ID is not known during the initial NE configuration, you can create the NE by searching for the NE and adding the NE.
Procedure Step 1 In NE List, click Add NE. The Add NE dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Set the parameters in the Add NE dialog box.
Step 3 Click OK. Then, the NE is added to the NE list successfully.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
1–49135
-
l
This parameter indicates the basic NE ID. When there is no extended ID, the basic NE IDs should be unique in the networks that are managed by the same NMS.
l
Set this parameter according to the DCN planning.
l
Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Extended ID
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
1–254
9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway Type
IP Gateway, Serial Port
IP Gateway
This parameter specifies the type of the gateway that is used for the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.
IP Address
-
This parameter is set to 129.9.0.x when the NE is delivered from the factory. "x" indicates the basic NE ID that is set when the NE is delivered from the factory.
This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway NE to which the NE to be created belongs. This parameter is displayed only when Gateway Type is set to IP Gateway.
Port
l
1400 (when Gateway Type is set to IP Gateway)
l
1400 (when Gateway Type is set to IP Gateway)
This parameter specifies the port corresponding to the gateway NE to which the NE to be created belongs.
l
COM1–COM32 (when Gateway Type is set to Serial Port)
l
COM1 (when Gateway Type is set to Serial Port)
Baud Rate
1200bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps
1200bps
This parameter specifies the communication rate between the NE to be created and the corresponding gateway NE. This parameter is displayed only when Gateway Type is set to Serial Port.
User Name
-
lct
This parameter specifies the name of the user. This parameter can take the default value in the case of initial login.
Password
-
-
The default password of user lct is password.
9.1.3 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.
Prerequisite The network communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal. The NE to be managed must be created in the NE list.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login. 9-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
TIP
You can select more than one NE at one time.
The IE displays the NE Login dialog box. Step 2 Enter the User Name and Password. Then, click OK.
l
The default User Name is lct.
l
The default Password of user lct is password. NOTE
User lct has the system level authority.
The Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE. Step 3 Click NE Explorer. The NE Explorer is displayed. TIP
To quick start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE List.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
TIP
l
Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout diagram.
l
Click
to fold/unfold the legend.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
User Name
-
lct
Indicates the user name of the NE. In the case of the initial login, you can adopt the default value.
Password
-
-
The default Password of user lct is password.
Use same user name and password to login
Selected or deselected
Deselected
When this parameter is selected, enter the User Name and Password to log in to all the selected NEs.
Use the user name and password that was used last time
Selected or deselected
Deselected
When this parameter is selected, enter the User Name and Password that were used for the latest login to log into the NE.
9.1.4 Modifying the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. The modification does not affect services.
9-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Prerequisite l
The user must log in to the NE.
l
You must be an NE user with "Maintenance Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. The system displays the Modify NE ID dialog box. Step 3 Set a new ID for the NE.
Step 4 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New ID
1 to 49135
-
l
The new ID refers to the basic ID. When the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE within any network that is managed by an NMS must be unique.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning of the DCN.
l
When the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not modify the extended ID.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
1 to 254
New Extended ID
9
NOTE
The NE ID has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and the lowest 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet ID of the NE is 9 and the basic ID is 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Postrequisite After you change the ID of an IDU 610/620 NE, you only need to re-log in to the NE, thus recovering the communication between the NMS and the NE.
9.1.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE After modifying the NE ID, you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineering planning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services, but modifying the IP address of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.
Prerequisite l
The user must log in to the NE.
l
You must be an NE user with "Maintenance Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the IP.
Step 3 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP
-
This parameter is preset to 129.9.0.x during the factory delivery, where "x" indicates the basic ID.
l
If the NE is planned as the gateway NE, the NE IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must comply with the requirements for planning the external DCN.
l
If the NE is planned as a non-gateway NE, the IP addresses of other NEs should be set according to the NE IDs. In this case, the IP address should be set to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1.
9-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Postrequisite After the IP address of the NE is changed, you need to log in to the NE again.
9.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards If the corresponding logical board is not added in the slot layout diagram, add the logical board. If the added logical board mismatches with the physical board, delete the logical board and add the correct logical board.
Prerequisite l
All the required boards must be properly installed.
l
You must have logged in to the NE.
l
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Context To facilitate management, the NE software considers the physical boards as one or multiple logical boards. In the IDU 610/620: l
An SCC physical board is considered as a logical SCC and a logical EOW board. The slot number of the logical SCC board is 2, and the slot number of the logical EOW is 21.
l
Other physical boards of the IDU are considered as the logical boards with the same names. The slot numbers of the logical boards are the same as the slot numbers of the corresponding physical boards.
An ODU is considered as an ODU logical board. The ODU logical slot number is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board connected to the ODU. The STAT indicator on the physical IDU board will be lit only if the logical IDU board matches with the physical IDU board.
Procedure Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Logical Boards. Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required but still not be configured for certain physical boards. Step 2 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be added, and select Add xxx. "xxx" refers to the boards to be added. NOTE
l
Add the PXC board before you add the IF boards and service boards.
l
Manually adding the logical boards applies to the cases when relevant data need to be configured before the physical boards are installed.
Step 3 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be deleted, and select Delete. Delete the services, clock, orderwire and protections on the boards before you delete the boards. ----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the NM time, you can record the exact time when alarms and performance events occur.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Precautions In the commissioning phase, you only need synchronize the NE time with the time of the Web LCT to ensure that the time of the alarms and abnormal events reported on the NE is approximately correct. After all the NEs are placed under the integrated network management, re-synchronize the NE time with the synchronization strategy of the network time.
Procedure Step 1 Ensure that the time zone and time on the NM computer are correctly set. Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Synchronous Mode. If ...
Then ...
Set Synchronous Mode to NULL, NTP, or NM
Set the related parameters, and then click Apply to perform Step 7.
Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP
Set the related parameters, and then click Apply to perform Step 4 to Step 6.
NOTE
If you only need to synchronize the NE time, and do not change the type of synchronization or parameters. Select the option about synchronization of the NE, right-click, and choose Synchronize with NM Time.
Step 4 Configure the upper-layer standard NTP server of the NE. 1.
Select the Standard NTP Server tab page, and then click Add.
2.
After setting the parameters of the standard NTP server, click OK. NOTE
l
If the NE is a gateway NE, set the external NTP server as the standard NTP server.
l
If the NE is not a gateway NE, set the gateway NE as the standard NTP server.
Step 5 Optional: Configure the NTP access control rights. 1.
Select the Access Control Rights tab page, and then click Add.
2.
After setting the parameters of the access control rights, click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Configure the NTP key. 1. 9-12
Select the Standard NTP Key Management tab page, and then click Add. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2.
9 Configuration Task Collection
After setting the parameters of the NTP key management, click OK. NOTE
l
Configuring the NTP key is required only when the NTP authentication is enabled.
l
To pass the NTP authentication, the NTP authentication must be enabled on both the client and the server, and Key, Password, and Encryption Type of the client must be consistent with those of the server.
Step 7 Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Mode
NTP, Standard NTP, NM, NULL
NULL
l
When this parameter is set to NM, the NE is synchronized with the Web LCT or server.
l
When this parameter is set to NTP, the NE is synchronized with the network time protocol (NTP) server through the NTP protocol.
l
When this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE is synchronized with the NTP server through the standard NTP protocol.
l
This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.
l
When this parameter is set to Enable, the NTP authentication is required. Therefore, the key used for the NTP authentication should be configured.
l
This parameter is valid only when Synchronization Mode is set to NTP.
l
This parameter indicates whether the NE functions as the ECC server and provides NTP service for the ECC communication between this NE and other NEs.
l
If this NE can communicate with the NTP server over IP but the other NEs that communicate with this NE over ECC cannot communicate with the NTP server over IP, set this parameter to ECC Server. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disable.
Standard NTP Authentication
Server Enabled
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enable, Disable
ECC Server, Disable
Disable
ECC Server
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-13
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Client Enabled
l
l
Synchronous Server
Polling Period (min)
The Number of Sampling
9-14
ECC Client, IP Client, Disable (when Server Enabled is set to ECC Server)
Default Value
Description
ECC Client
l
This parameter is valid only when Synchronization Mode is set to NTP.
l
When this parameter is set to ECC Client, the NE is synchronized with the ECC server of the NTP based on the ECC communication.
l
When this parameter is set to IP Client, the NE is synchronized with the NTP server based on the IP communication.
l
When the NE can implement communication directly through IP or the NTP server, set this parameter to IP Client. When the NE can communicate with the ECC server of the NTP over ECC, set this parameter to ECC Client.
l
When the NE functions as the ECC server and there is no NTP server, set this parameter to Disable.
l
This parameter is valid only when Synchronization Mode is set to NTP.
l
To modify this parameter, select this parameter and then right-click.
l
When Client Enabled is set to ECC Client, this parameter indicates the NE ID of the ECC server.
l
When Client Enabled is set to IP Client, this parameter indicates the IP address of the higher level NTP server.
l
This parameter is valid only when Synchronization Mode is set to NTP.
l
This parameter indicates the interval between the requests sent by the NTP client.
l
Set this parameter according to the requirements of the NTP server.
l
This parameter is valid only when Synchronization Mode is set to NTP.
l
This parameter indicates the number of NTP packets that are sent for obtaining information required for synchronizing the time at each request.
l
Set this parameter according to the requirements of the NTP server.
ECC Client, IP Client(when Server Enabled is set to Disable)
-
2–1440
1–8
-
120
8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronization Starting Time
-
-
l
Synchronization Period(days)
1–300
1 l
From Synchronization Starting Time on, synchronization operations are conducted every Synchronization Period(days). Set the two parameters according to the network time synchronization strategy.
Table 9-1 Parameters of the standard NTP server Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server Flag
NE ID, NE IP
NE ID
l
When ECC is used to communicate with the standard NTP server, set the parameter to NE ID
l
When the IP protocol is used to communicate with the standard NTP server, set the parameter to NE IP
Standard NTP Server
-
-
Sets the ID or IP address of the standard NTP server.
Standard NTP Server Key
0–1024
1
Indicates the NTP protocol key. 0 indicates that no key is required.
Standard NTP Version
2, 3
2
Set this parameter according to the settings for the standard NTP protocol version used at the peer end.
Used First
Yes, No
No
Sets whether to select this server preferentially when multiple NTP servers are available.
Table 9-2 Parameters of the access control rights Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACL No.
1–250
1
Indicates the number of the ACL.
NE Flag
NE ID, NE IP
NE ID
l
When ECC is used to communicate with the standard NTP server, set the parameter to NE ID
l
When the IP protocol is used to communicate with the standard NTP server, set the parameter to NE IP
NE
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
-
-
Sets the ID or IP address of the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-15
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Whether to Receive Data Packet
Yes, No
Yes
Sets whether to receive the packet transmitted from NE.
Right Level
query, synchronize, server, peer
query
The device provides four levels of access control. When an NTP access request is received on the local equipment, the request is matched with the levels from the minimum access limit to the maximum access limit, and the first matched level is given. The matching order is as follows: l
peer (minimum access limit): The time request and the control query can be carried out for the NTP service of the local equipment. The local clock can be synchronized to the remote server as well.
l
server: The time request and the control query can be carried out for the NTP service of the local equipment, but the local clock is not synchronized to the remote server.
l
synchronization: The time query is allowed for only the NTP service of the local equipment.
l
query (maximum access limit): The control query can be carried out only for the NTP service of the local equipment.
Table 9-3 Parameters of the standard NTP key management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encryption
MD5
MD5
Indicates the MD5 key algorithm.
Key
1–1024
1
Indicates the number of the key.
Password
-
-
Indicates the password of the key.
Trusted
Yes, No
No
If you set this parameter to No, the key is verified but cannot be trusted during the clock synchronization. Therefore, the clock of the NE cannot be synchronized.
9.1.8 Localizing the NE Time When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to localize the NE time to synchronize the NE with the local time. 9-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > NE Time Localization Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Correctly set the time zone and daylight saving time of the NE depending on the location of the NE.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value
Default Value
Description
Time Zone
-
-
l
The change of the time zone results in the transition of the current NE time.
l
Set this parameter according to the location of the NE.
l
The DST-related parameters are valid only if this parameter is set to Enabled.
l
Set these parameters depending on whether the location of the NE adopts the DST.
DST
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-17
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value
Default Value
Description
DST Rule
MM-WW-DD, MM-DD
MM-WW-DD
l
When the DST Rule is set to MM-WWDD, Start Time and Stop Time of the DST is set in month-week-day format.
l
When the DST Rule is set to MM-DD, Start Time and Stop Time of the DST is set in month-day format.
l
Set this parameter according to the DST rule in the location of the NE.
l
Start Time is automatically added with the DST Offset time according to the current NE time. Stop Time is automatically decreased by the DST Offset time according to the current NE time. Set the three parameters according to the DST rule in the location of the NE.
DST Offset
-
-
Start Time
-
-
Stop Time
-
-
l
l
9.2 Configuring Radio Links Configuring a radio link involves configuring the IF/ODU information of the radio link and the microwave features such as the XPIC, IF 1+1 protection, IF N+1 protection, and AM. 9.2.1 Creating IF 1+1 Protection In the case of the IDU 620, if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group. 9.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup When two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode, transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes. 9.2.3 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link This section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio links in the SDH/PDH microwave. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link. 9.2.4 Creating an N+1 Protection Group When the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-topoint mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration. 9.2.5 Creating REGs In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE. 9.2.6 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures the reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose bandwidth is large and changes dynamically. 9.2.7 Configuring the ATPC Function 9-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
9.2.1 Creating IF 1+1 Protection In the case of the IDU 620, if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The IF boards and their corresponding ODUs that form the IF 1+1 protection must be included in the NE Panel.
Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 service by configuring the 1+1 protection, the original services are not interrupted.
Precautions The 18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Step 3 Click New. The system displays the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box. Step 4 Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-19
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
1, 2
-
l
If only one IF 1+1 protection group is to be created, it is recommended that you set Protection Group ID to 1.
l
If two IF 1+1 protection groups are to be created, it is recommended that you set the Protection Group ID of the protection group that is formed by the IF boards in slots 5 and 7 to 1 and the Protection Group ID of the protection group that is formed by the IF boards in slots 6 and 8 to 2.
l
In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at the two ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
l
In the 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l
In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With the 1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l
The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SD protection mode are compatible with the 1+1 HSB switching function.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Working Mode
9-20
HSB, FD, SD
HSB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive, NonRevertive
Revertive
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal.
l
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l
When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enable and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end.
l
This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l
Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disable; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Enable.
l
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, two IF boards should be installed as a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is recommended to be the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is recommended to be the main board). In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed in slots 5–8. It is
WTR Time (s)
Enable Reverse Switching
Working Board
300 to 720
600
Enable, Disable
IF ports
Enable
-
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-21
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description recommended that you install two IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the main board).
Protection Board
NOTE
The parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time (s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link hop.
Postrequisite l
In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link later. The standby microwave link automatically copies the related information of the active microwave link except the transmission status of the ODU.
l
In the case of the 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the active microwave link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standby microwave link automatically copies the IF information of the active microwave link. NOTE
The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Hence, you do not need to configure the TX Status of the standby ODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.
9.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup When two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode, transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The IFX boards and the ODUs to which the IFX boards are connected must be created. The XPIC Enabled parameter must be set to Enabled (default value) for the IFX boards.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. 9-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create XPIC Protection Group dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the parameters for the XPIC workgroup.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Polarization direction-V
IF ports of IFX boards
-
l
Polarization direction-H l
Link ID-V
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
1 to 4094
1
l
Polarization direction-V and Polarization direction-H indicate the IF ports to which polarization direction V and polarization direction H correspond respectively. It is recommended that you install the two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup in the slots that are at the same layer or in the same column. Set the IF port on the IFX board that has a smaller slot number to Polarization direction-V and the IF port on the other IFX board to Polarization direction-H. Link ID-V and Link ID-H indicate the link IDs to which polarization direction V and polarization direction H correspond respectively.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-23
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Link ID-H
Description l
l
l
TX Power (dBm)
Transmission Frequency (MHz)
9-24
-10.0 to 35.0
0 to 4294967.295
0
100
A Link ID is an identifier of a microwave link and is used to prevent the microwave links between sites from being wrongly connected. When the Link ID received by an NE is different from the Link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. Set these two parameters according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but the Link ID-V must be set to the same value at the two ends of a link and the Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at the two ends of a link.
l
The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU.
l
The TX power of the ODU must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning information.
l
The parameter specifies the channel center frequency.
l
The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be greater than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmission Status
mute, unmute
mute
l
When Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals.
l
When Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals.
l
In normal cases, set this parameter to unmute.
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function enables the TX power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range.
l
In the case of areas where fast fading is severe, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled.
l
During commissioning, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the TX power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.
l
Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB.
Enabled, Disabled
ATPC Enabled
Disabled
ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)
-20 to -75
-45
ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -90
-70 l
NOTE
Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.
Postrequisite Generally, you do not need to configure the IF/ODU information after you configure an XPIC workgroup. You, however, need to set the T/R spacing used by the ODU in the IF/ODU Configuration tab page if the used ODU supports two T/R spacings.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-25
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.2.3 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link This section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio links in the SDH/PDH microwave. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. In the case of the IDU 610/620, the IF board and the ODU that connects to the IF board must be added.
Precautions l
In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600.
l
In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this case, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600 and the ODU information of the standby OptiX RTN 600.
l
In the case of XPIC radio links, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. The IF/ODU information of the radio links should be configured in the XPIC workgroup.
l
In the case of N+1 radio links, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radio links and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links should be set respectively.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click IF/ODU Configuration. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board belongs. Step 4 Set the corresponding IF information of the radio link.
9-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Set the corresponding ODU information of the radio link. Step 7 Click Apply. NOTE
Click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and after you set the ODU information of the radio link.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-27
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPS K
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK (IF1A/B)
l
2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK (IF0A/B)
This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K
7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM (IFX)
l
The IF1A/IF1B board supports radio work modes 1–15 and the IF0A/IF0B board supports radio work modes 5 and 16–18. The IFX board supports radio work mode 7.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK
l
The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Work Mode.
6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM
l
Set this parameter according to the planning. The radio work modes of the IF boards at both the radio link must be the same.
4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPS K 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM 16,5E1,7MHz,QPS K 17,10E1,14MHz,Q PSK 18,2E1,3.5MHz,QP SK
9-28
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Link ID
1–4094
1
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to avoid misconnection of radio links between sites.
l
If this parameter is different from Received Link ID, the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same.
l
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the TX power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the RX level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
l
It is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled in areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission.
l
To ensure that the TX power does not change during the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled. After the commissioning is complete, you can set this parameter to another value.
l
The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range.
l
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
l
When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used.
ATPC Enable Status
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-29
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Frequency (MHz)
0–4294967.295
0.0
l
The parameter specifies the channel center frequency.
l
This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum TX frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum TX frequency supported by the ODU - 50% channel spacing.
l
The difference between the TX frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning.
l
This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU.
l
The TX power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning.
l
This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX frequency and receive frequency of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power.
l
If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used.
l
The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
l
When this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals.
l
When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals.
l
Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
TX Power (dBm)
T/R Spacing (MHz)
TX Status
9-30
-10.0 to +35.0
0–4294967.295
mute, unmute
-10.0
0.0
unmute
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
NOTE
The ATPC attributes at both the ends of a radio link should be set to the same.
9.2.4 Creating an N+1 Protection Group When the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-topoint mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. The STM-1 optical/electrical interface boards (only in the case of the primary NE that is to be configured with 3+1 protection) must be created. The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
Background Information When an N+0 service is converted into an N+1 service by configuring the N+1 protection, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Function Tree and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the N+1 Protection tab. Step 2 Click Create. The system displays the Create an N+1 Protection Group dialog box. Step 3 Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group. Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. 1.
In Select Mapping direction, select Working Unit.
2.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which a working channel corresponds and click
.
3.
Repeat Step 4.2 to select the line ports to which other working channels correspond.
4.
In Select Mapping direction, select Protection Unit.
5.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-31
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l
When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When SD enable is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
SD enable
9-32
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Slot Mapping Relation
-
-
l
In the case of 2+1 protection, map two IF ports as Working Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
l
In the case of the 3+1 protection, it is recommended that you map the two IF ports and the first line port of the STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the secondary NE as Working Unit, and map the other line port as Protection Unit.
NOTE
The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must have the same attributes.
9.2.5 Creating REGs In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created. The STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the primary NE must be created. The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
Context In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to two configure REGs for the secondary NE.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > REG Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The system displays the Create REG dialog box. Step 3 Set the SD Enabled parameter. Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. 1.
In Slot Mapping Direction, select West Line.
2.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the west line corresponds and click .
3. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
In Slot Mapping Direction, select East Line. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-33
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
4.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the east line corresponds and click .
Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5, Create another REG.
----End 9-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l
When this parameter is set to Enabled, the REG inserts an MS-AIS alarm when a B2_SD alarm is generated.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Slot Mapping Relation
-
-
It is recommended that you map the IF port as West Line and the port of the STM-1 optical/electrical interface board as East Line.
9.2.6 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures the reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose bandwidth is large and changes dynamically.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Background Information The IDU 620 supports the Hybrid/AM function. The IFH2 board is used as the Hybrid IF board.
Procedure Step 1 Select the target Hybrid IF board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Hybrid/ AM Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Step 3 Set the parameters related to the Hybrid/AM function. NOTE
To set the Hybrid IF board to work in super PDH mode of 40M/64QAM, do as follows: 1. Set AM Enable Status to Disable. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to 64QAM. Click Apply. 2. Set IF Channel Bandwidth to 40M. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-35
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
In the case of the IFH2 board of the IDU 620:
7M
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. Set this parameter to the planned value.
l
7M
l
14M
l
28M
l
40M
l
56M
NOTE Only the combination of the IF Channel Bandwidth of 40M and the modulation mode of 64QAM forms the super PDH mode. The super PDH mode does not support the AM function.
AM Mode
Asymmetric
-
When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AM switching in one direction of the radio link (when the conditions for triggering the AM switching are met) does not cause an AM switching in the other direction of the radio link.
AM Enable Status
l
Disable
-
l
l
Enable
When this parameter is set to Disable, the radio link uses the specified modulation scheme only. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.
l
When this parameter is set to Enable, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid microwave can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide dynamic bandwidth for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. Modulation Mode of the Assured AM Capacity
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
9-36
l
QPSK
l
16QAM
l
32QAM
l
64QAM
l
128QAM
l
256QAM
l
QPSK
l
16QAM
l
32QAM
l
64QAM
l
128QAM
l
256QAM
QPSK
This parameter specifies the lowest modulation scheme that the AM function supports. Set this parameter to the planned value. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid microwave must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enable.
128QAM
This parameter specifies the highest modulation scheme that the AM function supports. Set this parameter to the planned value. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid microwave and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Manually Specified Modulation Mode
l
QPSK
l
16QAM
l
32QAM
l
64QAM
l
128QAM
l
256QAM
E1 Capacity
1–75
9 Configuration Task Collection
Default Value
Description
-
This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for the transmission. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disable.
-
This parameter specifies the number of E1 services that can be transmitted in the Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services permitted in Assured E1 Capacity. E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
9.2.7 Configuring the ATPC Function To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The related IF board must be added.
Precautions l
In the case of the IF boards that are configured with the 1+1 protection, set only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board.
l
The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also set ATPC parameters in the following configuration dialog boxes: –
Create an XPIC working group
–
IF/ODU configuration
NOTE
In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box, the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be modified.
Procedure Step 1 Select the IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 3 Set the ATPC attributes. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-37
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range.
l
In the case of areas where fast fading is severe, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled.
l
Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB.
ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)
-20 to -75
-45
ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -90
-70
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
9-38
l
Enabled
l
The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range.
l
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
l
When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
NOTE
l
Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.
l
During commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.
9.3 Configuring MSP The MSP includes the ring MSP and linear MSP. 9.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you can configure the ring MSP. 9.3.2 Creating Linear MSP To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes, configure the linear MSP.
9.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you can configure the ring MSP.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.
Background Information When an unprotected service is converted into a ring MSP service by configuring the ring MSP, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service. Step 3 Click OK. The system displays the Create a Ring Multiplex Section dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the ring MSP protection group according to the networking plan. Step 5 Set the slot mapping relation. 1.
Set Local Node, West Node, and East Node according to the networking plan.
2.
In Select Mapping Direction, select West Line 1.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-39
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
3.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds and click
.
4.
In Select Mapping Direction, select East Line 1.
5.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click
.
Step 6 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
STM-4
STM-4
The value is always set to STM-4.
Protection Type
2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section
2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section
The value is always set to 2-fiber Bidirectional Multiplex Section.
Local Node
0 to 15
0
l
This parameter specifies the node ID allocated to the local NE.
l
The node ID of each NE must be unique.
West Node
9-40
0 to 15
0
This parameter specifies the node ID that is allocated to the NE to which the west line board of the local NE is connected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
East Node
0 to 15
0
This parameter specifies the node ID that is allocated to the NE to which the east line board of the local NE is connected.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l
When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter, a revertive switching occurs.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When SD enable is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
The new protocol is more mature than the restructure protocol but the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards than the new protocol.
l
It is recommended that you select the new protocol. When the OptiX equipment is interconnected with the third-party equipment, select the restructure protocol if an interconnection problem occurs when the new protocol is adopted.
Enabled, Disabled
SD enable
Protocol Type
New Protocol, Restructure Protocol
Enabled
New Protocol
Slot Mapping Relation
-
-
It is recommended that you map the line port of the SL4 board in slot 6 as West Line 1 and map the line port of the SL4 board in slot 8 as East Line 1.
Map as VC4
Selected, Not selected
Not selected
l
If you select Map as VC4, the VC-4 is considered as the unit of the settings in the slot mapping relation.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE
The protection groups of the NEs that form a ring multiplex section must be set with the same attributes except Local Node, West Node, and East Node.
Postrequisite In the case of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, you need to configure bidirectional crossconnections between the services and the timeslots of the working channel (the first half of the timeslots of the line port) later. If extra services need to be transmitted, you need to configure Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-41
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the timeslots of the protection channel (the second half of the timeslots of the line port).
9.3.2 Creating Linear MSP To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes, configure the linear MSP.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.
Background Information When an unprotected service is converted into a linear MSP service by configuring the linear MSP, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The system displays the Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box. Step 3 Set the attributes of the linear MSP group. NOTE
When Protection Type is set to 1:N Protection. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service.
Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation. 1.
In Select Mapping direction, select West Working Unit.
2.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds and click
3.
In Select Mapping direction, select West Protection Unit.
4.
In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds and click
9-42
.
.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1+1 Protection, 1:N Protection
1+1 Protection
l
Switching Mode
l
Single-Ended Switching, DualEnded Switching (1+1 protection)
l
Dual-Ended Switching (1:N protection)
l
Single-Ended Switching (1+1 protection)
l
Dual-Ended Switching (1:N protection)
l
l
l
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
In the single-ended mode, if the services on the working channels in a certain direction need to be switched, only the services on the working channels in the direction are switched to the protection channels. In the dual-ended mode, the services on the working channels in two directions are switched to the protection channels. When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-43
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Revertive Mode
l
Non-Revertive, Revertive (1+1 protection)
l
Revertive (1:N protection)
WTR Time(s)
SD enable
Protocol Type
9-44
300 to 720
Default Value l
Non-Revertive (1 +1 protection)
l
Revertive (1:N protection)
600
Enabled, Disabled
New Protocol, Restructure Protocol
Enabled
New Protocol
Description though the former working channel is restored to normal. l
When extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels exist, select 1:N protection.
l
In the case of other situations, it is recommended that you select the 1+1 single-ended and non-revertive mode.
l
This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l
When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When SD enable is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
The new protocol is more mature than the restructure protocol but the restructure protocol is in better compliance with the standards than the new protocol.
l
It is recommended that you select the new protocol. When the OptiX equipment is interconnected with the third-party equipment, select the restructure protocol if an interconnection problem occurs when the new protocol is adopted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD/SF PRI Switching Tag
High priority, Low priority
High priority
l
When this parameter is set to High priority, "1101" and "1011" are used as an SF/SD switching request.
l
When this parameter is set to Low priority, "1100" and "1010" are used as an SF/SD switching request.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When this parameter is set to Indicated, the MSP protocol uses K2 (bit 6 to bit 8) to indicate the switching mode (that is, uses code "100" to indicate the singleended mode and code "101" to indicate the dual-ended mode).
l
When this parameter is set to Not indicated, the MSP protocol does not indicate the switching mode.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
In the case of 1+1 protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit; in the case of 1:N protection, a maximum of three line ports can be mapped as West Working Unit.
l
Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit.
l
Ensure that the line port that is mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port that is mapped as West Working Unit are not on the same board, if possible.
Not indicated, Indicated
Switching Mode Indication
-
Slot Mapping Relation
l
Not indicated (1 +1 protection)
l
Indicated (1:N protection)
-
NOTE
Ensure that the MSP groups of the equipment at both ends of the linear multiplex section are set with the same attributes.
Postrequisite l
In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels later. If extra services need to be transmitted, it is necessary to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the protection channels.
l
In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure unidirectional cross-connections between the services and the protection channels, in addition to configuring the bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-45
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.4 Configuring SDH/PDH Services (NE Configuration) The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services according to the cross-connection mode. 9.4.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links. 9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink. 9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink. 9.4.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions. 9.4.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service When a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources. 9.4.6 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services After converting the normal services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receive direction of the SNCP services. 9.4.7 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services After converting the SNCP services into the normal services, you can convert the SNCP crossconnection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services.
9.4.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links.
VC-12 Timeslot Numbering Two numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links when you create cross-connections. l
By order This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme, where the numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21. This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.707, which is the default scheme adopted by the OptiX equipment.
l
9-46
Interleaved scheme Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme, where the numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x 3 + TU-12 number. The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment that adopts the interleaved scheme or when specific timeslot numbering scheme is required. Figure 9-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order TUG-2
1
TUG-3
2
3
{ { {
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
4
7
10
13
16
19
1
22
25
28
31
34
37
40
2
43
46
49
52
55
58
61
3
2
5
8
11
14
17
20
1
23
26
29
32
35
38
41
2
44
47
50
53
56
59
62
3
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
1
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
2
45
48
51
54
57
60
63
3
TU-12
Figure 9-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme
1
TUG-3
2
3
{ { {
1
2
TUG-2 3 4
1
4
7
2
5
3
5
6
7
10
13
16
19
1
8
11
14
17
20
2
6
9
12
15
18
21
3
22
25
28
31
34
37
40
1
23
26
29
32
35
38
41
2
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
3
43
46
49
52
55
58
61
1
44
47
50
53
56
59
62
2
45
48
51
54
57
60
63
3
TU-12
VC-3 Timeslot Numbering A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. If you need to configure VC-3 crossconnections and VC-12 cross-connections in a VC-4 path at the same time, note that the timeslots in the TUG-3 that are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12 cross-connections.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-47
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink.
Prerequisite l
The source and sink boards must be configured.
l
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering scheme used for the crossconnections.
Step 3 Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the cross-connections of the service.
Step 5 Click OK.
9-48
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
NOTE
l
When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation may fail due to the limited number of licenses.
l
The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4 services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. For example, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of licenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number of licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12/VC3/VC4
VC12
l
This parameter indicates the level of the cross-connections.
l
In the case of E1 services or data services in bound VC-12 paths, set this parameter to VC12.
l
In the case of E3/T3 services or data services in bound VC-3 paths, set this parameter to VC3.
l
If all the services in a VC-4 path are passed through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.
l
When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink only.
l
When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and from the service sink to the service source.
l
It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Direction
Unidirectional, Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Source
-
-
Sets the slot of the source service.
Source VC4
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the VC-4 path where the service source is located.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-49
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6)
-
-
l
This parameter indicates the timeslot range corresponding to the service source.
l
This parameter can be set to a value or multiple values. When this parameter is set to multiples values, use "," to separate each value and use "–" to indicate sequential numbers. For example, "1,3– 6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
If the IF board works in the PDH mode, E1s/E3s 1–n transmitted over radio correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1– n. Ports 1–n of E1 interface boards and E3/T3 interface boards correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1–n.
l
The E1s 1–75 transmitted on the IFH2 board correspond to the 1–63 VC-12 timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1–12 VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.
Sink
-
-
Sets the solt of the sink service.
Sink Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port where the service sink is located.
Sink VC4
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the VC-4 path where the service sink is located.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3–6)
-
-
l
This parameter indicates the timeslot range corresponding to the service sink.
l
This parameter can be set to a value or multiple values. When this parameter is set to multiples values, use "," to separate each value and use "–" to indicate sequential numbers. For example, "1,3– 6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
If the IF board works in the PDH mode, E1s/E3s 1–n transmitted over radio correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1– n. Ports 1–n of E1 interface boards and E3/T3 interface boards correspond to VC-12/VC3 timeslots 1–n.
l
The E1s 1–75 transmitted on the IFH2 board correspond to the 1–63 VC-12 timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1–12 VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.
9-50
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a protection source correspond to a service sink.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The boards where the source and the sink are must be configured.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
Step 3 Click Create SNCP. The system displays the Create SNCP Service dialog box. Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-51
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Click OK. NOTE
l
When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation may fail due to the limited number of licenses.
l
The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4 services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. For example, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of licenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number of licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
-
9-52
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12, VC3, VC4
VC12
l
Specifies the level of the crossconnection to be created.
l
If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 paths, set this parameter to VC12.
l
If the service is an E3/T3 service or a data service that is bound with VC-3 paths, set this parameter to VC3.
l
If all the services in a VC-4 pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal.
l
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.
l
It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
l
When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction are created.
l
When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the crossconnections in the SNCP receive direction and the cross-connections in the SNCP transmit direction are created.
l
It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
l
When a line fault occurs, an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600.
Revertive Mode
Direction
Hold-off Time (100ms)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Non-Revertive, Revertive
Unidirectional, Bidirectional
0 to 100
Revertive
Unidirectional
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-53
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l
This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l
When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Source Slot
-
-
Indicates the source slot of the service.
Source Port
-
-
Specifies the port where the service source exists.
Source VC4
-
-
Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l
Specifies the timeslot range to which the service source corresponds.
l
You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Sink Slot
-
-
Indicates the sink slot of the service.
Sink Port
-
-
Specifies the port where the service sink exists.
Sink VC4
-
-
Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service sink exists.
9-54
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l
Specifies the timeslot range to which the service sink corresponds.
l
You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Postrequisite If Direction is set to Unidirectional, the cross-connection only in the SNCP receive direction is created. Hence, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working trail, and later, a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail.
9.4.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic switching conditions.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. An SNCP protection group at the VC-4 level must be configured.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the working service corresponds. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box. Step 3 Select SD switching conditions. Then, click OK. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-55
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the protection service corresponds. The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box. Step 5 Repeat Step 3. Step 6 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt box asking you whether to carry out the switching. Step 7 Click Yes. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
HPUNEQ
Selected, Not selected
Not selected
l
When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_UNEQ alarm as an SD switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the HP_TIM alarm as an SD switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_SD alarm as an SD switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When this item is selected, the SNCP service considers the B3_EXC alarm as an SD switching condition.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
HPTIM
B3SD
B3EXC
Selected, Not selected
Selected, Not selected
Selected, Not selected
Not selected
Not selected
Not selected
NOTE
It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as Initiation Condition of the protection service.
9-56
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.4.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service When a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The cross-connections of the service must be configured and the service is not be used.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the SNCP service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. Step 4 Click Delete. Then, a dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Step 5 Click Query. At this time, the cross-connection of the SNCP service is already deleted. ----End
9.4.6 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services After converting the normal services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receive direction of the SNCP services.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The unidirectional cross-connection of normal services must be configured and the source of the cross-connection must be a line board.
Background Information When this task is performed to convert a normal service into an SNCP service, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-57
9 Configuration Task Collection
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Step 2 Select the bidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then, right-click and choose Expand from the shortcut menu. Step 3 Select the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then, right-click and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu. Then, the Convert to SNCP service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP service.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
9-58
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive, Revertive
Revertive
l
When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal.
l
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.
l
It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
l
When a line fault occurs, an NE can perform SNCP switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value because the SNCP cannot co-exist with other protection switching modes in the OptiX RTN 600.
l
This parameter is valid only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l
When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a revertive switching occurs.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Hold-off Time (100ms)
WTR Time(s)
0 to 100
300 to 720
0
600
Source
-
-
Indicates the source slot of the service.
Source Port
-
-
Specifies the port where the service source exists.
Source VC4
-
-
Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service source exists.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-59
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l
Specifies the timeslot range to which the service source corresponds.
l
You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Sink
-
-
Indicates the sink slot of the service.
Sink Port
-
-
Specifies the port where the service sink exists.
Sink VC4
-
-
Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the service sink exists.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l
Specifies the timeslot range to which the service sink corresponds.
l
You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
In the case of an IF board that works in the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/ E3s transmitted by microwaves correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly, the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface board or an E3/T3 interface board correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/ VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Postrequisite The SNCP service after the conversion is the SNCP service only in the receive direction. Later, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working 9-60
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
trail, and a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. The normal service can be converted into the SNCP service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the configuration.
9.4.7 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services After converting the SNCP services into the normal services, you can convert the SNCP crossconnection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal services.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The current service is transmitted in the working path. The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured.
Background Information When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a normal service, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection and click To Normal. Step 3 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection. Right-click and choose Change to Normal Service from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Choose Working or Protection from the displayed menu. l
To convert the cross-connection into a cross-connection between the working source and the service sink, choose Working.
l
To convert the cross-connection into a cross-connection between the protection source and the service sink, choose Protection.
----End
Postrequisite You need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working path or the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection path. The SNCP service can be converted into the normal service both in the receive direction and the transmit direction only after the deletion.
9.5 Configuring the Clock This topic describes how to configure the clock. In a digital transmission network, all the transmission nodes must be synchronized. Otherwise, buffer overflow or exhaustion of the signal Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-61
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
bits generated at the transmission nodes causes sliding damage to the digital flow, thus resulting in data errors. To ensure time synchronization, configure the clock for each NE. In the case of a complex network, configure clock protection at the same time. 9.5.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clock synchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actual networking architecture. 9.5.2 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock. 9.5.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simple networks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. The clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complex clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring networks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol. 9.5.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality. 9.5.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters In certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined quality of the clock sources.
9.5.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clock synchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actual networking architecture.
Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Chain/Tree Network The clock synchronization schemes for chain/tree networks are as follows: l
If the main (first) node accesses a clock source (external clock or line clock), configure this clock source for this node.
l
Configure the clock source of the higher-level radio link for other nodes.
l
When the higher-level radio link adopts 1+1 protection, configure two clock sources for the corresponding node. Note that the clock source priority of the main radio link should be higher than the clock source priority of the standby radio link.
l
When multiple higher-level radio links exist, (for example, when the radio link is configured with XPIC or N+1 protection), the node configures a microwave clock source for each radio link and allocates different clock priority levels based on the situation of each radio link.
l
Do not configure the synchronization status message (SSM) or extended SSM protection.
Figure 9-3 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a chain network.
9-62
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
l
The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence, the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IF1A boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an IF 1+1 protection group (the board in slot 5 is the main board) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4 provides the radio link from NE4 to NE3. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 9-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network NE1
NE2
5-IF1A-1/ 7-IF1A-1/ Internal
External 1/ Internal
NE3
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
NE4
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
Master clock
Figure 9-4 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a tree network. l
The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an XPIC workgroup (the IFX board in slot 5 works on polarization V and the IFX board in slot 7 is works on polarization H) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE4 provides the radio link from NE4 to NE3. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-63
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Figure 9-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network NE3
NE1
NE2 5-IF1A-1/ Internal
NE4 4-SL1-1/ Internal
5-IFX-1/ 7-IFX-1/ Internal
Master clock
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Ring Network The clock synchronization schemes for a ring network formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment only or formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment and other OptiX equipment are as follows: l
When the entire ring network line is an SDH line, set the SSM or extended SSM according to the clock synchronization schemes of an optical transmission network.
l
When a PDH section exists on the line of the ring network, divide the ring network into two chains and set the synchronization according to the clock synchronization schemes of a chain network.
Figure 9-5 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which the entire ring network line is an SDH line.
9-64
l
The SSM or extended SSM protection is enabled on all the nodes in the ring network.
l
The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence, the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The clock source priority levels of other nodes are the west clock source, east clock source, and internal clock source in the descending order.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Figure 9-5 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line) NE2
NE6 NE1
West/ East/ Internal
West/ East/ Internal
External 1/ Internal
West/ East/ Internal
West/ East/ Internal NE3 Master clock
NE4 West/ East/ Internal
NE5
Figure 9-6 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which not the entire ring network line is an SDH line. l
This ring network is formed by PDH microwave. Hence, divide the ring network at the main node NE1 into two chains: from NE1 to NE2 and from NE3 to NE4.
l
The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
NE2 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the west clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
NE4 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
NE3 traces the clock of NE4. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-65
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Figure 9-6 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line) NE1
NE2
NE4 4-SL1-1/ Internal
NE3
West/ Internal
Master clock
East/ Internal
East/ Internal
Clock Synchronization Scheme for Networking with Convergence at Tributary Ports Networking with convergence at tributary ports indicates that several OptiX RTN 600 NEs are converged to the higher-level OptiX RTN NE through the E1/E3 cable. The clock synchronization schemes for networking with convergence at tributary ports are as follows: l
The higher-level NE accesses the clock source (external clock source or line clock source).
l
The lower-level NEs trace the tributary clock sources (port 1 and port 5 of the PO1/PH1/ PD1 board can be used as the tributary clock sources).
l
When a lower-level NE is connected to multiple hops of radio links, abnormal pointer adjustments may occur if the lower-level NE traces the tributary clock. Therefore, the lower-level NEs should trace the external clock output by the higher-level NE.
l
Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 9-7shows the clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports.
9-66
l
The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence, the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
NE3 converges services TO NE2 through ports 1–4 of the PO1 board in slot 4. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are 4-PO1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l
Multiple microwave hops exist in the downstream of NE4. In this case, the downstream nodes will report point adjustments if NE4 adopts the tributary clock source. Hence, NE4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
adopts the external clock output from NE2 as the external clock input to the PXC board in slot 1. l
Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 9-7 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports NE3
NE1
NE2
4-PO1-1/ Internal NE4
External 1/ Internal
5-IF1A-1/ Internal
External/ Internal Master clock
E1
External clock
Precautions for Making the Clock Synchronization Scheme The precautions for making the clock synchronization scheme are as follows: l
The number of the NEs on the long clock chain must not exceed 20. It is recommended that the long clock chain contains less than 10 NEs. If the long clock chain contains too many NEs, new clock sources need be added to the chain for use compensation.
l
Use SDH interface boards to converge services at the convergence node. Thus, the clock signals can be passed over SDH signals not over PDH signals, which ensures the high quality of the clock.
9.5.2 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The PXC boards and input/output clock source boards must be configured. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-67
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the clock sources.
TIP
By pressing the Ctrl key, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources. Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this clock source. The clock priority levels are arranged in the descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority. Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources.
Step 8 Click Apply. ----End
9-68
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
–
–
l
External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 1. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the port of the PXC board in slot 3.
l
IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwave clock source.
l
IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock source of the synchronous Ethernet.
l
The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode.
l
Determine the clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels according to the clock synchronization schemes.
l
This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal.
l
Set this parameter depending on the external clock signal. Generally, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
l
This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s.
l
This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM.
l
This parameter need to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. Generally, the external clock sources use the SA4 to pass the SSM.
2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz
External Clock Source Mode
Synchronization Status Byte
SA4–SA8
2 Mbit/s
SA4
9.5.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simple networks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. The clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complex clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring networks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-69
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The clock source priority table must be configured.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enable the clock protection protocol. 1.
Click the Clock Subnet tab.
2.
Enable the clock protection protocol and set the protocol parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the SSM output port. 1.
Click the SSM Output Control tab.
2.
Set the SSM output port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the clock ID output port.
9-70
1.
Click the Clock ID Status tab.
2.
Set the clock ID output port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
3.
9 Configuration Task Collection
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Status
Start Extended SSM Protocol, Start Standard SSM Protocol, Stop SSM Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
l
The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management in an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically select the clock source with the highest quality and highest priority, thus preventing clock mutual tracing.
l
The extended SSM protocol is the extension of the standard SSM protocol. It defines the unique ID for each clock source and uses the higher four bits of the S1 byte to pass the ID. The extended SSM protocol can be used to prevent the NEs from tracing their own clocks.
l
If third-party equipment exists in the ring network, enable the SSM protocol. If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring network and clock mutual tracing can be prevented through certain configurations of the clock sources, the SSM protocol can also be enabled.
l
If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring network, it is recommended that the extended SSM protocol is used.
l
This parameter is used when the clock subnet need to be created on the NMS.
l
The NEs that trace the same clock source should be allocated with the same clock subnet ID.
Affiliated Subnet
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
0–255
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-71
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source ID
(None), 0–15
(None)
l
This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled.
l
Allocate the clock source ID for the following clock sources only:
Control Status
Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled.
Enabled
Enabled
–
External clock sources
–
Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources
–
Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings
–
Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings
l
This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is enabled.
l
This parameter indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port.
l
When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
l
This parameter is valid only when the SSM protocol is enabled.
l
This parameter indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port.
l
When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet and the extended SSM protocol is enabled at the remote NE, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
9.5.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The PXC board must be configured. 9-72
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Precautions In the OptiX RTN 600, external clock source 1 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 1 and external clock source 2 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 3.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the clock output parameters.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
External Clock Output Mode
2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz
2 Mbit/s
l
This parameter indicates the mode of the output clock.
l
Set this parameter according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
l
This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2 Mbit/s.
l
This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM.
l
When this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that each bit can transmit the SSM.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
l
This parameter indicates the lowest clock quality of the output clock. When the clock quality is lower than the parameter value, the signal is not output.
l
When this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the clock signal is continuously output.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
External Clock Output Timeslot
External Clock Output Threshold
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
SA4–SA8, ALL
Threshold Disabled, Not Inferior to G. 813 SETS Signal, Not Inferior to G. 812 Local Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal, Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal
ALL
Threshold Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-73
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition
No Failure Condition, AIS, LOF, AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition
l
This parameter indicates the conditions when the 2M phase-locked clock source fails.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
This parameter is valid only when 2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition is No Failure Condition.
l
This parameter indicates the action of the 2M phase-locked loop when 2M PhaseLocked Source Fail Condition is met.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output, 2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable, Send AIS
Shut Down Output
9.5.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters In certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined quality of the clock sources. Table 9-4 lists the navigation path for customizing the clock parameters. For details, see the Online help of the NMS. Table 9-4 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters Clock Parameter
Navigation Path
Clock source switching condition
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
Clock source quality
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree.
9.6 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes how to configure the orderwire, synchronous data services, asynchronous data services, and external alarms. 9.6.1 Configuring the Orderwire This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. When the orderwire is enabled, it can provide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers. 9.6.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services 9-74
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
To configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN 600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame or STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level. 9.6.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiX RTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1–Serial4 in the normal SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services. 9.6.4 Configuring External Alarms To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOW board of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.
9.6.1 Configuring the Orderwire This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. When the orderwire is enabled, it can provide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Context The communication channel must be available for activating the orderwire. l
When an SDH optical/electrical line exists between two NEs, the overhead byte E1 or E2 in the SDH frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel.
l
When a radio link exists between two NEs, a fixed overhead byte in the radio frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel.
l
When no SDH optical/electrical line and microwave link exists between two NEs, connect the external clock ports or synchronous data ports of the two NEs to provide the orderwire communication channel.
The OptiX RTN 600 supports the group call function of the orderwire. When an OptiX RTN 600 dials the orderwire group call number 888, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN 600s in the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 600 answers the phone call, the other OptiX RTN 600s stop ringing, that is, the group call becomes a point-to-point call between two NEs.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-75
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Modify the orderwire occupied overhead bytes. 1.
Click the Advanced tab.
2.
Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
9-76
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Call Waiting Time (s)
1–9
9
l
This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection.
l
If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 5s. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 9s.
l
Set the same call waiting time for all the NEs.
l
This parameter indicates the orderwire phone number of the local station.
l
The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that the phone number consists of three numerics.
l
The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs according to the NE IDs.
l
The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.
Phone 1
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
100–99999999
101
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-77
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Orderwire port
Line ports, external clock port, F1 port
-
l
This parameter indicates the ports that can transmit the orderwire information.
l
The OptiX RTN 600 does not support conference calls and thus allows the lines that transmit the orderwire information to form a loop.
l
If the radio link between two nodes is configured with 1+1 protection, only the line port of the main IF board need to be used as the orderwire port.
l
If multiple links (for example, configured with XPIC or N+1 protection) exist between two nodes, the line ports corresponding to all the links need to be used as the orderwire ports.
l
When orderwire communication is implemented by interconnecting the two NEs through the external clock ports, the external clock ports need to be used as the orderwire ports.
l
When orderwire communication is implemented by interconnecting the two NEs through the synchronous data ports, the F1 port need to be used as the orderwire port.
l
This parameter indicates the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire information.
l
Regardless the parameter value, the radio link uses a fixed self-defined overhead byte to transmit the orderwire information. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.
Orderwire Occupied Bytes
E1, E2
E1
9.6.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services To configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN 600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame or STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. 9-78
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
The boards that are related to the synchronous data services must be configured.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the F1 Data Port tab. Step 3 Press the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Click .
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Data Channel 1, Data Channel 2
Depending on the board configuration , the following ports can be selected: SDH optical/ electrical port, IF port, F1 port, and external clock port of the PXC board.
-
l
When the SDH optical/electrical line port is selected, the F1 byte in the SDH frame of this port is used.
l
When the IF port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
l
When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port conforms to the G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/s.
l
When the PXC-1 is selected, the external clock port of the PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port of the overhead bytes.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-79
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.6.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiX RTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1–Serial4 in the normal SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The boards that are related to the asynchronous data services must be configured.
Context The asynchronous data port of the OptiX RTN 600 is an RS-232 port and can implement the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The service transmission is required to be point-to-point transparent transmission. Therefore, the port rate and transmission control protocol need not be configured and the maximum communication rate is 19.2 kbit/s. Hence, the asynchronous data port is also considered as the transparent data port.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of the broadcast data port.
9-80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1– SERIAL4
SERIAL1
l
In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l
In the case of a radio link, a self-defined Serial overhead byte in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l
When this parameter is set so that it is the same as the SERIAL byte corresponding to the Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data port on the SCC board is used. When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the Overhead Byte of this port is used. When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined Serial byte in the radio frame of this port is used. When this parameter is set to the external clock port on the PXC board, the external clock port on the PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port of overhead bytes.
Broadcast Data Source Broadcast Data Sink
Depending on the board configuration , the following values can be selected: SERIAL1– SERIAL4, SDH optical/ electrical port, IF port, and external clock port of the PXC board.
No Data
l l l
9.6.4 Configuring External Alarms To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOW board of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Context The external alarms of the OptiX RTN 600 are also considered as housekeeping alarms. The external alarm port of the OptiX RTN 600 is a relay port. This port can be either in the "on" state or in the "off" state. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-81
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
OptiX RTN 600 IDU 610/620 provides two alarm output ports and six alarm input ports. The alarm input ports report the RELAY_ALARM alarm (the alarm parameter indicates the port number of the input alarm) after the external alarm is triggered. To ensure that the external alarm port works normally, the external alarm cables must be correctly connected.
Procedure Step 1 Select the EOW board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the input alarm. 1.
Select Input Relay from the drop-down list.
2.
Set the parameters of the input alarm.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure the output alarm. 1.
Select Output Relay from the drop-down list.
2.
Set the parameters of the output alarm.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Using Status
Used, Unused
Unused
This parameter is valid for the input relay and is used to set the usage status of this alarm port.
9-82
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
Alarm Mode
l
Input Relay: Relay Turns On/ Low Level, Relay Turns Off/High Level
l
Output Relay:
9 Configuration Task Collection
Default Value
Description
Input Relay:
Input Relay:
Relay Turns On/Low Level
l
If this parameter is set to Relay Turns On/Low Level, the alarm is generated when the relay is on.
l
If this parameter is set to Relay Turns Off/High Level, the alarm is generated when the relay is off.
l
l
Output Relay: Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns Off
Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns Off, Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns On
Output Relay: l
If this parameter is set to Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns Off, the alarm is generated when the relay is off.
l
If this parameter is set to Alarm Occurs when Relay Turns On, the alarm is generated when the relay is on.
Use or Not
Used, Unused
Unused
This parameter is valid for the output relay and is used to set the usage status of this alarm port.
Working Mode
Automatic, Manual
Automatic
This parameter is valid for the output relay.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
l
Automatic: Changing the status of the output relay according to Alarm Trigger Conditions and Alarm Mode
l
Manual: Determining the status of the output relay manually
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-83
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Alarm Trigger Conditions
l
l
Available values when Working Mode is set to Automatic: Input Path 1–Input Path 6, Automatically Triggered by Major Alarms, Automatically Triggered by Critical Alarms, and Automatically Triggered by Critical and Major Alarms
Default Value l
l
Automatic: Automatically Triggered by Critical and Major Alarms Manual: Output High Level in Manual
Description This parameter is valid for the output relay. l
Automatic: Automatically changing the status of the relay according to the preset value
l
Manual: Outputting the high level or low level according to the setting
Available values when Working Mode is set to Manual: Output Low Level in Manual and Output High Level in Manual
9.7 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values of the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the parameters of the ports need to be modified. 9.7.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of the SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports. 9.7.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces By performing the operations, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of the tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retiming function. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signal equalization. 9.7.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes and ATPC attributes of the IF boards. 9.7.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes, power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
9-84
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.7.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of the SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required SDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Path) (default option of the system). Step 3 Select Port from the dropdown list and set the parameters of the SDH interface board.
Step 4 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. Step 5 Select VC4 Path from the dropdown list. Step 6 Configure VC-4 path loopback.
Step 7 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. ----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-85
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value
Default Value
Description
Laser Switcha
Open, Close
Open
l
This parameter indicates whether the laser is enabled to receive/transmit optical signals.
l
Normally, this parameter takes the default value.
l
Optical (electrical) inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the SDH optical (electrical) signals to be transmitted to the opposite end.
l
Optical (electrical) outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the SDH optical (electrical) signals to be received.
l
Normally, this parameter takes the default value.
l
VC-4 path inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be transmitted to the opposite end.
l
VC-4 path outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be received.
l
Normally, this parameter takes the default value.
Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC4 Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
NOTE
a: Only SDH optical interface boards support this parameter.
9.7.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces By performing the operations, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of the tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retiming function. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signal equalization.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required PDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. 9-86
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default value). Step 3 Select Path from the drop-down list, Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces according to the types of the PDH interfaces. l
Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces on the E1 interface board.
l
Set the parameters of the PDH interface on the E3/T3 interface board.
Step 4 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed and click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tributary Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback
l
Tributary inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the tributary signals to be transmitted to the remote end.
l
Tributary outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the tributary signals to be received.
l
Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
l
This parameter is valid for the tributary ports that are configured with services.
l
When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in this path.
l
When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether alarms exist in this path.
l
Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
Service Load Indication
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Load, Non-Loaded
Load
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-87
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Retiming Modea
Normal, Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, Retiming Mode of CrossConnect Clock
Normal
l
By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, thus decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal.
l
When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used.
l
When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced.
l
When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced.
l
It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, is used to provide an external clock for the client equipment.
l
If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you adopt Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock.
l
This parameter indicates the type of the services the tributary board processes.
l
Set this parameter according to the type of the accessed services.
l
This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to T3.
l
This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized.
l
If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Equalized. Otherwise, adopt the default value.
Port Service Typeb
Input Signal Equalizationb
9-88
E3, T3
E3
Unequalized, Equalized
Unequalized
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Output Signal Equalizationb
Unequalized, Equalized
Unequalized
l
This parameter is valid only when Service Type is set to T3.
l
This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized.
l
If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Equalized. Otherwise, adopt the default value.
NOTE
l
a: Only E1 interface boards support this parameter.
l
b: Only E3/T3 interface boards support the parameters.
9.7.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes and ATPC attributes of the IF boards.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required IF boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab. Step 3 Set each parameter for the IF attributes.
NOTE
The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 6 Set each parameter for the ATPC attributes.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-89
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 7 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK (IF1A/B)
l
This parameter indicates the radio work mode in "work mode, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.
l
The IF1A/B board supports radio work modes 1 to 15. The IF0A/B board supports radio work modes 5, 16, 17, and 18. The IFX board supports radio work mode 7 only.
l
The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode.
l
Set this parameter according to the network planning. The radio work modes of the IF boards at both the radio link must be the same.
2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK
5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK (IF0A/B) 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM (IFX)
6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM 16,5E1,7MHz,QPS K 17,10E1,14MHz,Q PSK 18,2E1,3.5MHz,QP SK
9-90
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l
As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to avoid misconnection of radio links between sites.
l
If this parameter is different from Received Link ID, the NE reports the MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into the downstream.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs at both the ends of a radio link should be the same.
l
IF port inloop indicates that loopback occurs in the IF signals to be transmitted to the remote end.
l
IF port outloop indicates that loopback occurs in the IF signals to be received.
l
Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
l
In the case of the IFX board, this parameter is valid only when Radio Work Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM.
l
In the case of the IF1A/B board, this parameter is valid only when Radio Work Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM.
l
This parameter indicates whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service.
l
The wayside E1 service is a 2.048 kbit/s service that is transmitted by the microwave frame overhead. The IDU 610/620 accesses the wayside E1 service through the external clock interface on the PXC board.
l
This parameter is valid only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l
This parameter indicates the slot in which the PXC board accesses the wayside E1 service through the external clock port.
IF Port Loopbacka
2M Wayside Enable Statusb
2M Wayside Input Boardb
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop
Enabled, Disabled
1, 3
Non-Loopback
Disabled
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-91
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
XPIC Enablec
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
l
This parameter indicates whether the XPIC function is enabled.
l
If the IF board does not use the XPIC function, set this parameter to Disabled. In this case, use the XPIC cable to perform self-loop at the XPIC port.
l
This parameter indicates whether the ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures that the TX power of the transmitter automatically traces the changes of the RX level at the receive end, within the ATPC controlled range.
l
It is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled in areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission.
l
To ensure that the TX power does not change during the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled. After the commissioning is complete, you can set this parameter to another value.
l
Set the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold so that the central value is equal to the required value of the receive power. Ensure that the difference between values of the automatic ATPC upper threshold and the automatic ATPC lower threshold is not less than 5 dB.
ATPC Enable Statusd
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
ATPC Upper Threshold (dBm)d
-20 dBm to -75 dBm
-45 dBm
ATPC Lower Threshold (dBm)d
-35 dBm to -90 dBm
-70dBm
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled, Disabled
9-92
l
Enabled
l
This parameter sets whether to enable the ATPC. The ATPC function enables the transmit power of a transmitter to automatically trace the change of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end within the ATPC control range.
l
When the function is enabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid. The equipment automatically uses the preset ATP upper and lower thresholds based on the working mode of the IF board.
l
When the function is disabled, the manually set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are used.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
NOTE
l
a: The IFH2 and IFX boards do not support the loopback on the IF ports.
l
b: The IFH2 and IF0A/B boards do not support wayside E1 services.
l
c: The IFH2, IF0A/B, and IF1A/B boards do not support the XPIC function.
l
d: The ATPC attributes need to be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link.
9.7.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes, power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required IF boards must be added. The corresponding ODU must be added in the slot layout diagram.
Context Procedure Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab. Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing.
Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab. Step 6 Configure the transmit power and receive power of the ODU.
Step 7 Click Apply. Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status.
Step 10 Click Apply. ----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-93
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
-
-
l
The parameter specifies the channel center frequency.
l
This parameter cannot be set to a value that is less than the minimum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU + 50% channel spacing or more than the maximum Transmit frequency supported by the ODU - 50% channel spacing.
l
The difference between the Transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link is a T/R spacing.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning.
l
This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the rated power range supported by the ODU.
l
Set this parameter to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset value. The maximum transmit power adjusted by ATPC should not exceed this value.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning.
l
This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range supported by the ODU.
l
The Transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
Transmit Power (dBm)
9-94
-
-
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Receive Power (dBm)
-
-
l
This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function.
l
When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU exceeds the range of receive power±3 dB, the ODU LED of the IF board connected to the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l
After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function.
l
Set this parameter according to the planning.
l
This parameter indicates the spacing between the TX power and receive power of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX power is one T/R spacing higher than the receive power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX power is one T/R spacing lower than the receive power.
l
If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used.
l
The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
l
When this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but the ODU can normally receive microwave signals.
l
When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally receive and transmit microwave signals.
l
Generally, this parameter takes the default value.
T/R Spacing (MHz)
Configure Transmission Status
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
0–4294967.295
mute, unmute
-
unmute
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-95
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.8 Configuring Overhead Bytes This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified. 9.8.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead You need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected with the Hybrid microwave. 9.8.2 Configuring RSOHs This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE. 9.8.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads (POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote NE. 9.8.4 Configuring VC-3 POHs You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm. 9.8.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads, when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
9.8.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead You need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected with the Hybrid microwave.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board, and choose Configuration > Overhead Management > 1588 Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the enable status of 1588 Overhead. Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
9-96
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter Description Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1588 Overhead
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
When the Hybrid microwave is interconnected with the Packet microwave, this parameter is set to Enabled.
l
When the Hybrid microwave is interconnected with the Hybrid microwave, this parameter is set to Disabled.
9.8.2 Configuring RSOHs This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required SDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the J0 byte. 1.
Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.
2.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Set the overhead byte.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-97
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
3.
Click OK.
Step 3 Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
J0 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Byte]HuaWei SBS
l
Two byte modes are supported: single byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically).
l
If the remote NE reports the J0_MM alarm, set this parameter according tot he J0 byte to be received at the remote NE.
l
Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), and disable mode.
l
When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J0 byte.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
-
J0 to Be Received ([Mode]Content)
Disable
9.8.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads (POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote NE.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The required line boards must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Select the line board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte.
9-98
1.
Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.
2.
Double-click the parameter to be modified. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed. 3.
Set the overhead byte.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.
6.
Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte. 1.
Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.
2.
Set the C2 byte.
Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 3.
Click OK.
4.
Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs. 1.
Click the Overhead Termination tab.
2.
Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs.
3.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.
4.
Click OK.
----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-99
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
J1 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Byte]HuaWei SBS
l
Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), and 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A).
l
If the remote NE reports the HP_TIM alarm, set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE.
l
Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and disable mode.
l
When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J1 byte.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
J1 to Be Received ([Mode]Content)
C2 to Be Sent
9-100
-
Disable
(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02) TUG Structure, (0x03) Locked TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05) Experimental Mapping, (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronization, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14) MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15) FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A) 10G Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF) Reserved, (0xE1) Reserved, (0xFC) Reserved, (0xFE)O.
(0x02) TUG Structure
If the remote NE reports the HP_SLM alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be received at the remote NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Parameter
Value Range
C2 to Be Received
181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS
VC4 Overhead Termination
Auto, PassThrough, Termination
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Default Value
Description If the local NE reports the HP_SLM alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.
Auto
l
When this parameter is set to PassThrough, the local NE detects the VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not detected) and then forwards the original overheads.
l
When this parameter is set to Termination, the local NE detects the VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not detected) and then generates new VC-4 overheads according to the board settings.
l
When this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 overhead termination of VC-4 pass-through services is Pass-Through and the overhead termination of the VC-3/VC-12 services is Termination.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-101
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.8.4 Configuring VC-3 POHs You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The corresponding E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Select the E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte. 1.
Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.
2.
Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set the overhead byte.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.
6.
Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte.
9-102
1.
Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.
2.
Set the C2 byte.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box. 3.
Click OK.
4.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
J1 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Byte]HuaWei SBS
l
Three byte modes are supported: single byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), and 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A).
l
If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE.
l
Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and disable mode.
l
When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J1 byte.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
J1 to Be Received ([Mode]Content)
C2 to Be Sent
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
-
Disable
(0x00)Unequipped, (0x01)Reserved, (0x02) TUG Structure, (0x03) Locked TU-n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, (0x05) Experimental Mapping, (0x12) 140M into C-4 asynchronization, (0x13)ATM Mapping, (0x14) MAN DQDB Mapping, (0x15) FDDI Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17) Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x18) HDLC/LAPS Mapping, (0x19)
(0x04)34M/45M into C-3 (E3/T3 interface boards) (0x02) TUG Structure (Ethernet boards)
If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be received at the remote NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-103
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
C2 to Be Received
Reserved for Special Purpose, (0x1A) 10G Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP Mapping, (0xCF) Reserved, (0xE1) Reserved, (0xFC) Reserved, (0xFE)O. 181 Test Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS
Default Value
Description If the local NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the C2 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.
9.8.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads, when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The corresponding E1 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.
Procedure Step 1 Select the E1 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the J2 byte. 9-104
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
1.
Click the Trace Byte J2 tab.
2.
Double-click the parameter to be modified. Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set the overhead byte.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.
6.
Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the signal flag. 1.
Click the Signal Flag tab.
2.
Set the signal flag in the V5 byte.
3.
Click Apply. Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
J2 to Be Sent ([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Byte]HuaWei SBS
l
Two byte modes are supported: single byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically).
l
If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the J1 byte to be received at the remote NE.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-105
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
J2 to Be Received ([Mode]Content)
-
Disable
l
Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte mode (the first byte is generated automatically), 64-byte mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and disable mode.
l
When this parameter is set to Disable Mode, the board does not detect the received J2 byte.
l
It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
V5 to Be Transmitted
V5 to Be Received
(0x00)Unequipped or SupervisoryUnequipped, (0x01) Equipped-NonSpecific Payload, (0x02) Asynchronous, (0x03)Bit Synchronization, (0x04)Byte Synchronization, (0x05)Retained Signal Flag, (0x06) O.181 Test Signal, (0x07)VC_AIS
If the remote NE reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the V5 byte to be received at the remote NE.
(0x02) Asynchronous
If the local NE reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter according to the V5 byte to be transmitted from the remote NE.
9.9 Adjusting the Alarm Management Function This section describes how to adjust the alarm management function of a board or port according to the service availability, thus improving the alarm monitoring efficiency. Table 9-5 lists the common alarm management functions. For details, refer to the OptiX Web LCT online Help. Table 9-5 Common alarm management functions
9-106
Alarm Management Function
Navigation Path
Major Application
Example
Reversing alarmsa
Select the board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Alarm > Alarm Reversion from the Function Tree.
Used to reverse the alarms of certain ports for which the service is unavailable
When no service is available at a line port, you can reverse the R_LOS alarm at the port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Alarm Management Function
Navigation Path
Major Application
Example
Suppressing alarms
Select the board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree.
Used to suppress the alarms that need not be handled
When two PXC boards are configured but only one power supply is accessed, you can suppress the VOLT_LOS alarm of the PXC board that is not fed with power.
Setting the bit error alarm threshold
Select the board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > Bit Error Alarm Threshold from the Function Tree.
Used to adjust the alarm threshold, depending on the sensitivity of the service to bit errors
When the data services are carried, you can set the bit error thresholdcrossing value to 10-6 and the bit error degrade threshold to 10-8.
NOTE
a: Before you set the alarms of the board to be reversed, you need to enable the alarm reversion function. Select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree. Set Reversion Mode to Automatic Reversion or Manual Reversion.
9.10 Enabling/Disabling the Monitoring of the NE Performance The NE performance monitoring function is enabled by default. You can disable and then enable the NE performance monitoring function manually.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the performance monitoring parameters according to the requirements. 1.
Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
2.
Select Enable or Disable in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.
3.
Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-107
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection NOTE
Normally, enable the 15-minute and the 24-hour performance monitoring at the same time.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
9.11 Configuring Ethernet Ports The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The external Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internal Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH. 9.11.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services. 9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network. 9.11.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700". 9.11.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth
9-108
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease the VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affect services.
9.11.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to the Ethernet services.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the NE Panel.
Precautions l
The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. –
Ethernet ports FE1–FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1–PORT4 respectively. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes, network attributes, and advanced attributes.
–
Ethernet ports FE1–FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1–PORT4 respectively. Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.
l
The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes, network attributes, and advanced attributes.
l
The Hybrid IF board (IFH2) provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services and it supports certain Ethernet service access functions. The procedure for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic attributes and flow control function.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. NOTE
If you need to configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on the IFH2 board, select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Set the basic attributes of the port. 1.
Click the Basic Attributes tab.
2.
Set the basic attributes of the port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-109
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the flow control mode of the port. 1.
Click the Flow Control tab.
2.
Set the flow control mode of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port. 1.
Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2.
Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port. 1.
Click the Network Attributes tab.
2.
Set the network attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 6 Optional: Set the advanced attributes of the port. 1.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
2.
Set the advanced attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
9-110
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
In the case of the port that accesses services, set this parameter to Enabled. In the case of other ports, set this parameter to Disabled.
l
If this parameter is set to Enabled for the port that does not access services, an ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
l
The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes.
l
When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation.
l
When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
l
When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
l
The GE optical interface on the EMS6 board supports the 1000M full-duplex mode only.
Working Mode
10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, Auto-Negotiation (EFT4)
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (EMS6) Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex (IFH2)
Maximum Frame Length
1518–1535 (EFT4) 1518–9600 (EMS6)
1522
The value of this parameter should be greater than the maximum length of a frame among all the data frames to be transported. In the case of the EFT4 board, this parameter is invalid for Jumbo frames. In the case of the EMS6 board, this parameter has a restriction on Jumbo frames. If Jumbo frames are not considered and the accessed services are ordinary Ethernet frames that use VLAN tags or do not have VLAN tags, it is recommended that you use the default value. If the access services include services that use double tags such as QinQ services, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 1526.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-111
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop
Non-Loopback
l
When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet frame signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back.
l
In normal cases, use the default value.
l
When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals that are to be sent to the remote end are looped back.
l
In normal cases, use the default value.
l
This parameter is used when Working Mode is not set to Auto-Negotiation.
l
When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames.
l
When this parameter is set to Send Only, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames.
l
When this parameter is set to Receive Only, the port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion.
l
The non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side.
PHY Loopback
NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Non-Loopback, Inloop
Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only (EFT4 and EMS6) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2)
9-112
Non-Loopback
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control (EFT4 and EMS6)
Disabled
l
This parameter is used when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.
l
When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control, the port can send and process PAUSE frames.
l
When this parameter is set to Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process received PAUSE frames.
l
When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can perform as follows:
Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control (IFH2)
Entry Detection
TAG
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enabled, Disabled
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
Enabled
Tag Aware
–
Sends and processes PAUSE frames.
–
Sends but does not process PAUSE frames.
–
Processes but does not send PAUSE frames.
l
The autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the local side must match the autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side.
l
This parameter specifies whether to check the incoming packets from the port according to the TAG attributes.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
l
When ports are configured with TAG flags, the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 9-6.
l
If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware.
l
If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access.
l
When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-113
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4095
1
l
This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l
For using this parameter, see Table 9-6.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
l
This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l
For using this parameter, see Table 9-6.
l
When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, set this parameter according to actual situations. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
l
When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes.
l
When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services.
l
In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created.
VLAN Priority
Port Type
0 to 7
0
UNI, C-Aware, SAware
UNI
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to restrict the traffic of broadcast packets according to the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets. When a broadcast storm may occur in the equipment on the opposite side, set this parameter to Enabled.
Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
10% to 100%
30%
The port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter should be greater than the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total packets when the broadcast storm does not occur. Generally, set this parameter to 30% or a greater value.
Loop Detection
Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
Sets whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists at the port.
9-114
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Table 9-6 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction
Ingress
Egress
Type of Data Frame
How to Process Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the frame.
The port discards the frame.
The port receives the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the frame.
The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame.
The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame.
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l
If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l
If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK) of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet services in the network.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-115
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Precautions The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards EFT4 and EMS6. l
The EFT4 board supports VCTRUNKs 1–4, which are bound with PORTs 1–4 respectively. The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes and network attributes.
l
The EMS6 board supports VCTRUNKs 1–8. VCTRUNKs 1–8 determine the services to be transmitted depending on information of the created Ethernet services.
The following procedures describe how to configure the internal port of an EMS6 board. The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes and network attributes.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Choose Internal Port. Step 2 Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port. 1.
Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
2.
Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the VC paths to be bound with the port. 1.
Click the Bound Path tab.
2.
Click Configuration. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box.
3.
In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the port to be configured.
4.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.
5.
Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .
9-116
6.
Optional: Repeat Step 3.5 and bind other VCTRUNKs.
7.
Click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Configure the LCAS function for the port. 1.
Click the LCAS tab.
2.
Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port. 1.
Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2.
Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 6 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port. 1.
Click the Network Attributes tab.
2.
Set the network attributes of the port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-117
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Protocol
GFP, LAPS, HDLC
GFP
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Scramble
Unscrambled, Scrambling Mode [X43+1], Scrambling Mode [X48+1]
Scrambling Mode [X43+1]
l
This parameter specifies the scrambling polynomial used by the mapping protocol.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Yes, No
Yes
l
This parameter is valid only when Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or HDLC.
l
When this parameter is set to Yes, the FCS is the result after you perform a negation operation for the CRC.
l
When this parameter is set to No, the FCS is the CRC.
l
When this parameter is set to FCS32, a 32-bit FCS is used.
l
When this parameter is set to FCS16, a 16-bit FCS is used.
l
When the Ethernet board uses the GFP mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32, FCS16, or No.
l
When the Ethernet board uses the HDLC mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16.
l
When the Ethernet board uses the LAPS mapping protocol, this parameter can be set to FCS32 or FCS16.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Set Inverse Value for CRC
Check Field Length
9-118
FCS32, FCS16, No
FCS32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
FCS Calculated Bit Sequence
Big endian, Little endian
l
Big endian (GFP)
l
Little endian (LAPS or HDLC)
Extension Header Option
No, Yes
No
Description l
When this parameter is set to Big endian, the least significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the most significant byte is placed last.
l
When this parameter is set to Little endian, the most significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the least significant byte is placed last.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
This parameter specifies whether the GFP payload header contains the extension header and eHEC.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNKs
VCTRUNK 1
This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured.
Available Bound Paths
-
-
Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter:
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
l
The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth required by services.
l
Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a VCTRUNK if possible. If the paths in several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority.
l
Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound.
l
Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths.
l
Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-119
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling LCAS
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
This parameter specifies whether the LCAS function is enabled.
l
The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.
l
This parameter specifies the sequence in which the LCAS sink sends the MST control packet and Rs-Ack control packet.
l
When this parameter is set to Huawei Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST.
l
When this parameter is set to Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the MST and then sends the Rs-Ack.
l
If the equipment on the opposite side is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Standard Mode. Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei Mode.
l
When a member link is faulty, the LCAS performs switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and performs an LCAS switching. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay.
l
If the paths of the VCTRUNK are configured with protection, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 2000 ms. Otherwise, set this parameter to 0.
l
When the time after a member link is restored to normal reaches the set value of this parameter, the VCG uses the restored member link.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
LCAS Mode
Hold Off Time (ms)
WTR Time(s)
9-120
Huawei Mode, Standard Mode
0, any integer that ranges from 2000 to 10000 and has a step of 100
0 to 720
Huawei Mode
2000
300
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TSD
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
This parameter specifies whether the TSD is used as a condition for determining whether a member link is faulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD. In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers to the B3_SD_VC3.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
l
This parameter specifies whether to check the incoming packets from the port according to the TAG attributes.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
l
When ports are configured with TAG flags, the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 9-7.
l
If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware.
l
If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access.
l
When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
l
This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l
For using this parameter, see Table 9-7.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
l
This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l
For using this parameter, see Table 9-7.
l
When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, set this parameter according to actual situations. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Entry Detection
TAG
Default VLAN ID
VLAN Priority
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enabled, Disabled
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
1 to 4095
0 to 7
Enabled
Tag Aware
1
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-121
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Type
UNI, C-Aware, SAware
UNI
l
When this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attributes.
l
When this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the port does not process data frames according to the tag attributes but processes the data frames according to the way of processing QinQ services.
l
In the case of QinQ services, set this parameter to the default value because the NE automatically sets network attributes according to the operation type that is set when the QinQ services are created.
NOTE
l
The Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line.
l
The Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must be the same as the Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the transmission line.
l
The timeslots to which the paths bound with a VCTRUNK correspond must be the same at both ends of a transmission line.
Table 9-7 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction
Ingress
9-122
Type of Data Frame
How to Process Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the frame.
The port discards the frame.
The port receives the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the frame.
The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame.
The port adds the VLAN tag to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame, and receives the frame.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Direction
Egress
9 Configuration Task Collection
Type of Data Frame
How to Process Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l
If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l
If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
9.11.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions The EMS6 board supports the modification of the type field of Jumbo frames.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Jumbo Frame from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the type field of Jumbo frames.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-123
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Jumbo Frame
00 00 to FF FF
88 70
This parameter specifies the type field of Jumbo frames. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed Jumbo frames.
9.11.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease the VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affect services.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal Port. Step 2 Click the Bound Path tab. Step 3 Click Configuration. The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box. Step 4 Optional: Dynamically increase the VCTRUNK bandwidth. 1.
In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.
2.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.
3.
Select desired items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .
4.
9-124
Optional: Repeat Step 4.3 and bind other VC paths.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Optional: Dynamically decrease the VCTRUNK bandwidth. 1.
Do not select the Display in Combination check box.
2.
Select the VC paths to be deleted in Selected Bound Paths and click
3.
Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 to delete other VC paths.
.
Step 6 Click OK. ----End
Parameters For specific parameters, see 9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board.
9.12 Creating Ethernet Services The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private line services and Ethernet LAN services. 9.12.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink. 9.12.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge. 9.12.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of the mounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port. 9.12.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-125
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service. 9.12.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service When an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line service to release the corresponding resources. 9.12.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service When an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release the corresponding resources.
9.12.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be added in the slot layout.
Precautions l
This topic does not describe the method for creating the QinQ service.
l
IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The EFT4 board is an Ethernet transparent transmission board, and the PORTs of the EFT4 board correspond to the VCTRUNKs. Hence, you do not need to create the Ethernet line service.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.
9-126
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Optional: Set the port attributes of the source port and sink port. NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
Step 5 Optional: Set the bound path. 1.
Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2.
In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.
3.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.
4.
Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .
5.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-127
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
6.
Click OK.
Step 6 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
EPL, EVPL (QinQ)
EPL
When creating the non-QinQ private line service, set this parameter to EPL.
Direction
Unidirectional, Bidirectional
Bidirectional
l
When setting this parameter to Unidirectional, create the service only from the service source to the service sink. That is, the service source is forwarded only to the sink port.
l
When setting this parameter to Bidirectional, create the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source. That is, when the service source is forwarded to the sink port, the service sink is forwarded to the source port.
l
Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
9-128
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
PORT1
l
This parameter indicates the port where the service source resides.
l
When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, use a specific PORT as the source port.
l
You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6).
l
When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source.
l
When you set this parameter to a non-null value, only the services of the source port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source.
l
This parameter indicates the port where the service sink resides.
l
Do not set the value of this parameter to the same as the value of Source Port.
l
When creating the bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, use a VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
Sink Port
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
1–4095
-
A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
PORT1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-129
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6)
1–4095
-
l
You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN (e.g. 1,3-6).
l
When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink.
l
When you set this parameter to a non-null value, only the services of the sink port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service sink.
Port Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
-
When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.
TAG
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
Tag Aware
l
When all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware.
l
When all of the accessed services are not frames with the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access.
l
When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
Configurable Ports
9-130
VCTRUNKs
VCTRUNK 1
This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Bound Paths
-
-
Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter: l
The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth required by services.
l
Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a VCTRUNK if possible. If the paths in several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority.
l
Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound. When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound.
l
Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths.
l
Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
9.12.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the bridge.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions l
This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q bridge.
l
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-131
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge according to the bridge type. l
Set the attributes of the 802.1q bridge.
l
Set the attributes of the 802.1d bridge.
Step 4 Configure the mounted ports of the bridge. 1.
Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.
9-132
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
2.
9 Configuration Task Collection
Select a port from the ports listed in Available Mounted Ports, and then click .
3.
Optional: Repeat Step 4.2 to select other mounted ports.
4.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound to the VCTRUNK. 1.
Click Configuration. The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2.
In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.
3.
In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths.
4.
Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .
5.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-133
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
6.
Click OK.
Step 6 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Name
-
-
This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this string to a value that contains the specific purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q, 802.1d, 802.1ad (EMS6)
802.1q
l
When setting this parameter to 802.1q, create the 802.1q bridge.
l
When setting this parameter to 802.1d, create the 802.1d bridge.
l
Using the 802.1q bridge is a priority. If the conditions of the VLAN that is used by the user are not known and if the user does not require the isolation of the data among VLANs, you can also use the 802.1d bridge.
l
This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q bridge.
9-134
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Switch Mode
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q), SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d)
IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (802.1q), SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (802.1d)
l
When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables.
l
If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted.
l
Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Mount Port
-
-
Configurable Ports
Mount each VCTRUNK of the port.
-
This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK whose VC paths are to be configured.
Available Bound Paths
-
-
Adhere to the following principles to plan and set this parameter:
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
l
The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be determined by the actual bandwidth of the service needs.
l
Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible. If the paths of several VC-4s need to be bound, the VC-4s that have the same transmission path take priority.
l
Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths. Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-3 paths are already bound; when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths first from the VC-4 certain of whose VC-12 paths are already bound.
l
As the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12 paths and VC-3 paths, give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with VC-3 paths.
l
Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-135
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.12.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of the mounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created.
Precautions
CAUTION Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Service Mount tab. Step 3 Modify the mounted port of this bridge and the related attributes of the mounted port.
To change the port that is connected to the 802.1d/802.1q bridge, click the corresponding Mount Port. After selecting the corresponding option from the drop-down list, click Apply. To change the port that is connected to the 802.1ad bridge, click Configure Mount. After changing the settings in the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. ----End 9-136
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
1 to 14
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Mount Port
Unconnected, a specific PORT, a specific VCTRUNK
-
l
Only the port that is selected as the mounted port of a bridge functions in the packet forwarding process of the bridge.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Port Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
Set Port Enabled to Enabled. Otherwise, the port cannot forward the service.
Hub/Spoke
Hub, Spoke
Hub
l
The Spoke ports cannot access each other. The Hub port and the Spoke port can access each other. The Hub ports can access each other.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
l
When ports are configured with TAG flags, the ports process frames by using the methods provided in Table 9-7.
l
If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware.
l
If all the accessed services are frames that do not have the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access.
l
When the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
TAG
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid
Tag Aware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-137
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, AutoNegotiation (EMS6)
Auto-Negotiation
l
The Ethernet ports of different types support different working modes.
l
When the equipment on the opposite side works in the auto-negotiation mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation.
l
When the equipment on the opposite side works in the full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
l
When the equipment on the opposite side works in the half-duplex mode, set the working mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
9.12.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The EVPLAN service must be created.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 3 Create the VLAN filter table. 1.
Click New. The Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
9-138
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
2.
Set VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6).
3.
Select a port from the ports listed in Available forwarding ports, and then click .
4.
Optional: Repeat Step 3.3 to select other forwarding ports.
5.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID (e.g: 1,3-6)
1–4095
-
l
You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "–" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3–6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-139
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
selected forwarding ports
This parameter indicates the ports that are mounted to a bridge.
-
l
The packets can be forwarded between the selected forwarding ports only.
l
The ports that are in selected forwarding ports can forward only the packet that carries the VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags.
l
The broadcast packet that is transmitted by the ports in selected forwarding ports is broadcast only to the ports included in selected forwarding ports.
9.12.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service When an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line service to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet private line service must be configured and the service is not be used.
Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 3 Select the Ethernet private line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Click Query. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted. ----End
9.12.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service When an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release the corresponding resources.
9-140
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet LAN service must be configured and the service is not used.
Background Information Deleting an Ethernet LAN service involves the following tasks: 1.
Deleting the VLAN filtering table
2.
Deleting the VB mounting relation
Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 3 Click the VLAN Filtering tab. Step 4 Select the VLAN filtering entries that need to be deleted. Then, click Delete. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 5 Click the Service Mount tab. Step 6 Select the Ethernet LAN service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. Step 7 Click Query. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed. At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted. ----End
9.13 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services In the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet services. 9.13.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the line board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over the transmission line. 9.13.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding crossconnection resources are released. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-141
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.13.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the line board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over the transmission line. See 9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to create the crossconnections of the Ethernet services. If SNCP is configured for the Ethernet services, see 9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services to create the cross-connections of the SNCP Ethernet services.
9.13.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding crossconnection resources are released.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > CrossConnection Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the Ethernet service that needs to be deleted in CrossConnection. Step 4 Click Close. Then, a dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Step 5 Click Query. At this time, the cross-connection of the Ethernet service is already deleted. ----End
9.14 Configuring the QoS The QoS provides differentiated services. Hence, you can configure the QoS to ensure the quality of the Ethernet services. 9.14.1 Creating a Flow In the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on which the same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR and CoS operations. 9.14.2 Creating the CAR CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards 9-142
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network. 9.14.3 Creating the CoS By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements. 9.14.4 Binding the CAR/CoS To enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS. 9.14.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables the packets to be transmitted at an even rate. 9.14.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags. 9.14.7 Modifying CAR Parameters The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. The CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher priority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process, restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust the rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak information rate. 9.14.8 Modifying CoS Parameters The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parameters may affect the priority of the egress packets.
9.14.1 Creating a Flow In the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on which the same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR and CoS operations.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The associated Ethernet service must be created.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-143
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the flow parameters.
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
9-144
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
Port Flow, Port +VLAN Flow, Port +SVLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow
Port Flow
Port flow: The packets from a certain port are classified as a type of flow. The Ethernet service associated with this flow type is the line service or Layer 2 switching service that uses this port as the service source. Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this port+VLAN as the service source. Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified SVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port + S-VLAN as the service source. Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified CVLAN+SVLAN are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port + C-VLAN + S-VLAN as the service source.
Port
VLAN ID
C-VLAN
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
PORT1–PORT6, VCTRUNK1– VCTRUNK8 (EMS6)
1–4095
1–4095
PORT1
1
1
l
When the associated service is the line service, set this parameter to the source port or sink port of the associated Ethernet service.
l
When the associated service is the Layer 2 switching service, set this parameter to a mounted port of the bridge.
l
This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow.
l
Set this parameter to the source VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
l
This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow.
l
Set this parameter to the source C-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-145
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN
1–4095
1
l
This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow
l
Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
Postrequisite After creating a flow, bind it to the corresponding CAR or CoS operation as required.
9.14.2 Creating the CAR CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thus restricting the traffic into the transmission network.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The New Car dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the CAR parameters.
9-146
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CAR ID
1–65535 (EMS6)
-
This parameter identifies a CAR operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
This parameter determines whether to enable the CAR operation performed on the flow bound to the CAR.
Committed Information Rate (kbit/s)
An integer ranging from 0 to 1048576, with a step of 64
0
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of the CAR and are forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
l
The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-147
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Committed Burst Size (kbyte)
0–1024
0
When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is not more than the CIR in a certain period, certain packets can burst and can pass the restriction of the CAR. These packets can be forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the CBS is determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR, the greater the CBS.
Peak Information Rate (kbit/s)
An integer ranging from 0 to 1048576, with a step of 64
0
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, these packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion.
l
The value of this parameter should not be more than the bandwidth at the port.
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)
9-148
0–1024
0
When the rate of the packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, certain packets can burst and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the set MBS. Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the MBS is determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR, the greater the MBS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Postrequisite After creating the CAR, bind the flow to the corresponding CAR operation as required.
9.14.3 Creating the CoS By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab. Step 3 Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the CoS parameters.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-149
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS ID
1–65535
1
This parameter identifies a CoS operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type
In the case of the EMS6 board:
-
l
If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
l
If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN priority, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the user priorities specified in the VLAN tags of these packets.
l
If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to differentiated services code point (DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.
9-150
l
simple
l
VLAN priority
l
DSCP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Priority
In the case of the EMS6 board: 0–7
0
This parameter specified which queue a packet is scheduled to. In the case of the EMS6 board: l
Each port on the EMS6 board supports eight egress queues, and the CoS priorities of these eight queues are from 0 to 7.
l
If the traffic shaping feature of all the queues is enabled or disabled, the queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue, and the other queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6).
l
If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled, the bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled, according to the set CIR. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled, according to the SP +WRR algorithm.
Postrequisite After creating the CoS, bind the flow to the corresponding CoS operation as required.
9.14.4 Binding the CAR/CoS To enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The flow and CAR/CoS must be created.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-151
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management. Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab. Step 3 Bind the CAR/CoS.
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound CAR
-
-
This parameter indicates the CAR ID corresponding to a CAR operation. Different CAR IDs should be bound to different flows, even though the parameters of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS
-
-
This parameter indicates the CoS ID corresponding to a CoS operation.
9.14.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables the packets to be transmitted at an even rate.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. 9-152
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 2 In Port List, select a port. Step 3 Set the traffic shaping information about the port queue.
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A specific PORT or VCTRUNK
-
This parameter indicates the port whose traffic is shaped.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
This parameter determines whether to enable the traffic shaping of an egress queue.
l
If the traffic shaping feature of certain queues is enabled, the bandwidth is allocated first to the queue whose traffic shaping feature is enabled, according to the set CIR. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the queues whose traffic shaping is disabled, according to the SP +WRR algorithm.
l
When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue.
l
The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR.
l
When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate restriction are directly discarded. When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the buffer of the CIR. When the buffer overflows, the packets are marked yellow and enter the egress queue, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of queue congestion.
l
The value of this parameter should not be more than the bandwidth at the port.
CIR (kbit/s)
PIR (kbit/s)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
An integer ranging from 0 to 1048574, with a step of 64
An integer ranging from 0 to 1048574, with a step of 64
0
0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-153
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.14.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The IFH2 board must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure Step 1 Select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set CoS Priority for User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag to User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
9-154
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Parameter
User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag. User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 2 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 3 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 4 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 5 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 6 in the VLAN Tag, User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag
-
This parameter specifies the data flows. The IFH2 boards supports differentiating the data flows according to the user priority levels in the VLAN tags of packets.
CoS Priority
0–3
0
l
This parameter specifies the queue to which a packet should be scheduled.
l
The IFH2 board supports four queues. The corresponding CoS priority levels that correspond to the four queues are 0– 3 and the scheduling scheme is SP. The higher the CoS priority, the higher is the queue priority.
9.14.7 Modifying CAR Parameters The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. The CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher priority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process, restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust the rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak information rate.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The CAR must be configured.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-155
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Select CAR ID that needs to be changed. Step 5 Modify the other parameters that need to be modified.
Step 6 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters For details, see 9.14.2 Creating the CAR.
9.14.8 Modifying CoS Parameters The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parameters may affect the priority of the egress packets.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The CoS must be configured.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab. Step 3 Click Query. Step 4 Select the CoS ID that needs to be changed. Step 5 Select the CoS Parameter that needs to be changed. 9-156
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 6 Modify CoS Priority.
Step 7 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters For details, see 9.14.3 Creating the CoS.
9.15 Creating a LAG Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The physical network topology must be established. Ethernet boards must be created.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Step 3 Click New and the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-157
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Optional: Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Set Port Priority and System Priority. NOTE
l
The port ID consists of Port and Port Priority. The port that has the smallest port ID in a LAG has the priority to be aggregated first.
l
The system ID consists of System Priority and System MAC Address. When the system negotiates with the remote system, the system with the smallest ID has the priority to choose the port. In this example, the system refers to the board, and the system MAC address refers to the MAC address of the board. The factory-set MAC address is globally unique and cannot be modified.
----End
Parameters
9-158
Field
Value
Default
Description
LAG No.
An integer from 1 to 7(EMS6)
-
Displays the LAG number.
LAG Name
For example: LAG_1
-
Displays the LAG name.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
LAG Type
Manual, Static
Static
l
Static: If this value is selected, you can manually create a LAG with the LACP protocol. You can verify the working status (selected or standby) of ports in the LAG. In a LAG, a port can be in the Selected or Standby state. The convergence information is exchanged among the different equipment through the LACP protocol, so that the convergence information can be consistent.
l
Manual: If this value is selected, you can manually create a LAG with no LACP protocol. The port can be in the UP or DOWN state. According to the physical (UP or DOWN) state of the port, you can determine whether to perform a convergence.
In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1+1 protection, this parameter is set to Manual. In other situations, set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-159
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
Load Sharing
Sharing, NonSharing
Sharing
l
Sharing: If this value is selected, each member link of a LAG has traffic at the same time and shares loads together. The load sharing can increase a higher bandwidth for the link. When the LAG members change, or certain links fail, the system automatically reallocates the traffic.
l
Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG has traffic, and other links are standby. In this case, a type of hot backup mechanism is provided. When the active link of a LAG fails, the system chooses one link from the standby links of the LAG and activates it, to suppress the link failure.
In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1+1 protection, this parameter is set to Non-Sharing. In other situations, set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment.
9-160
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode, MAC Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
This parameter can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Sharing.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive, Revertive
Revertive
This parameter can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Non-Sharing. When a LAG cooperates with IF 1 +1 protection of Hybrid radio, you need to set this parameter to NonRevertive.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-161
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
Main Port
For example: PORT1
-
The main port in a LAG. l
In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1 +1 protection, you need to select the port that is interconnected with the active IF board IFH2 for this parameter.
l
In other situations, set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment.
After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. Services cannot be added to a slave port. When the Load Sharing parameter is set to Non-Sharing, all services are transmitted on the link to which the main port is connected. The links to which other slave ports are connected function as protection links.
9-162
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
Slave Port
-
-
The slave port in a LAG. The parameter specifies that a link aggregation group is manually created rather than being automatically created by the system. A link aggregation group contains main ports and slave ports. The slave ports in a link aggregation group are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the link aggregation group.
Available Slave Ports
Selected Slave Ports
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
For example: PORT2
For example: PORT2
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l
In the case of the LAG that is created for the IF 1 +1 protection, you need to select the port that is interconnected with the standby IF board IFH2 for this parameter.
l
In other situations, set this parameter according to the requirements of the opposite equipment.
Displays the port that is selected as a slave port.
9-163
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
Status
Unknown, In Service, Out of Service
-
The parameter specifies the state, which is derived from logical computation, of each member ports in a link aggregation group.
Port Priority
0-65535, in step length of 1
32768
l
If you do not query a LAG, the port status is Unknown.
l
If the port is the actually working port and services are forwarded at the port, the port status is In Service.
l
If the port is the standby port and no service is forwarded at the port, the port status is Out of Service.
This parameter is valid only when the LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. When ports are added into a LAG, the port with highest priority is preferred to transmit services.
9-164
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
System Priority
0-65535, in step length of 1
32768
This parameter is valid only when LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. This parameter indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets, both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Then, the computation result based on the logic that is selected by the LAG with the higher system priority is considered as the result of both LAGs. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same, the system MAC addresses are compared. Then, the computation result based on the logic that is selected by the LAG with lower system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs.
System MAC Address
For example: 00-16EC-FA-AC-0A
-
Displays the system MAC address.
NOTE
For different boards, the value ranges of the port and system priorities are different.
9.16 LPT Configuration When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT port and the related information. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-165
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet data board supports the LPT function. The port-based Ethernet private line service must be created and activated. The data service is configured as the pure transparent service.
Precautions NOTE
l
Point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT are mutually exclusive. On one board, you can select only one configuration mode to realize the LPT function.
l
The data service of the point-to-point LPT is configured as the pure transparent service.
CAUTION Before configuring the point-to-multipoint LPT function, make sure that the following two conditions are met. Otherwise, the services may be interrupted. l
The data services are displayed in the tree topology.
l
The data service topology is consistent with that of the LPT.
Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Point LPT. 1.
Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2.
Select a PORT and a VCTRUNK port, and then set the following parameters.
NOTE
If LPT is enabled, you can set Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms) and VCTRUNK Port HoldOff Time(ms) as required.
3.
Click Apply and a prompt appears telling you the operation was successful.
4.
Click Close.
5.
Repeat Steps 1 through 2 to configure point-to-point LPT for the opposite NE.
Step 3 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT. 9-166
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
1.
Click Advanced Configuration.
2.
In the LPT Management window, click New.
3.
In the Create LPT window, select Port from the Convergence Point pane, and set HoldOff Time(ms).
NOTE
If the port at the convergence point is a VCTRUNK port, you need to set Bearer Mode.
4.
In the Access Point pane, select an appropriate Port and click . Double-click Bearer Mode and select an appropriate bearer mode from the drop-down list. NOTE
l
If the port at the convergence point is not a VCTRUNK port, do not set Bearer Mode.
l
If you want to modify Bearer Mode, you can modify it in the Modify LPT window.
5.
Click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
6.
Repeat Steps 1 and Steps 3 to configure point-to-multipoint LPT for other NEs.
----End
Parameter Table 9-8 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Field
Value
Default
Description
Port
For example: PORT1
-
The external port of board.
VCTRUNK Port
For example: VCTRU NK1
-
The VCTRUNK port where EPL services are transparently transmitted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-167
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Field
Value
Default
Description
Direction
Positive, Reverse
-
The direction of the EPL services that are transparently transmitted. The direction is Positive if the source port is a PORT port and the sink port is a VCTRUNK port. The direction is Reverse if the source port is a VCTRUNK port and the sink port is a PORT port.
LPT
Yes, No
No
Sets whether to use LPT.
Bearer Mode
GFP (HUAW EI), Ethernet
GFP(HUAWEI)
This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs.
Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time (ms)
0 to 10000
100
VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time (ms)
0 to 10000
The bearer mode of LPT frames. This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. When the LPT switching is enabled, the port informs the opposite end after the hold-off time. 100
This parameter is valid only when the LPT occurs. When the LPT switching is enabled, the port informs the opposite end after the hold-off time.
Table 9-9 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT Field Convergence Point
9-168
Port
Value
Default
Description
PORT1 to PORT6, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8
PORT1
The port where the convergence point resides.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Field Bearer Mode
9 Configuration Task Collection
Value
Default
Description
GFP (HUAWEI), Ethernet
GFP (HUAWEI)
The bearer mode of the port where the access point resides. This parameter can be edited only when it is supported by a board.
Access Point
Hold-Off Time (ms)
0 to 10000
0
If LPT switching is enabled, the port notifies the opposite end after the holdoff time.
Port
PORT1 to PORT6, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8
-
The port where the access point resides.
Bearer Mode
GFP (HUAWEI), Ethernet
GFP (HUAWEI)
The bearer mode of the port where the access point resides. This parameter can be edited only when it is supported by a board.
9.17 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature You can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to the actual service requirements. 9.17.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode. In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually created entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, static entry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry). 9.17.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5 minutes by default. 9.17.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol In the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge and set bridge parameters and port parameters. Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-169
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.17.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet. 9.17.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes by default. 9.17.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly received broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.
9.17.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode. In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually created entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, static entry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry).
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The VLAN filter table must be created.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Create the unicast entry manually.
9-170
1.
Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Unicast tab.
2.
Click New. The Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set the parameters of the unicast entry.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
4.
9 Configuration Task Collection
Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Create the disabled entry manually. 1.
Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Disable MAC Address tab.
2.
Click New. The Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed.
3.
Set the parameters of the disabled entry.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
1–4095
-
l
In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the 802.1ad bridge, this parameter is invalid if the SVL mode is used. The set entry applies to all the VLANs.
l
In the case of the 802.1q bridge and the 802.1ad bridge, the set entry applies only to the VLAN whose ID is equal to the set value of this parameter if the IVL mode is used.
l
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
MAC Address
-
-
Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Physical Port
Each port that is mounted to a bridge
-
This parameter indicates the Ethernet port corresponding to a MAC address. Set this parameter according to actual situations.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-171
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.17.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5 minutes by default.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Modify the aging time of the MAC address table entry. 1.
Double-click MAC Address Aging Time corresponding to this Ethernet switching board. The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed.
2.
Set the duration and unit of the aging time.
3.
Click OK.
Step 3 Click Apply. ----End
9-172
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address Aging Time
1 Min to 120 Day
5 Min
l
If one entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the relearning of this MAC address, this entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time.
l
If this parameter is set to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive MAC address table entries that are outdated, which exhausts the resources of the MAC address forwarding table.
l
If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the MAC address table entry that is needed, which reduces the forwarding efficiency.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
9.17.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol In the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge and set bridge parameters and port parameters.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree. Step 2 Optional: Set the enabled status of the protocol. 1.
Click the Protocol Enable tab.
2.
Configure parameters of the enabled protocol.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-173
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
3.
Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Set bridge parameters. 1.
Click the Bridge Parameter tab.
2.
Set bridge parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set port parameters. 1.
Click the Port Parameter tab.
2.
Set port parameters.
3.
Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: If you are enabling the RSTP, set the point-to-point attribute of the Ethernet port. 1.
Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.
2.
Set the point-to-point attribute.
3.
Click Apply.
----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
This parameter determines whether to enable the spanning tree protocol.
l
It is recommended that you do not enable the STP or RSTP in the service networking process, because this can prevent the Layer 2 service from forming the loop.
l
If the loop is already formed in the service networking, you must start the STP or RSTP.
9-174
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
STP, RSTP
RSTP
l
This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled.
l
The protocol type should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
l
The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicates the priority of the bridge.
l
The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority and the higher the possibility that the bridge is selected as the root bridge.
l
If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
l
This parameter indicates the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port.
l
The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
l
This parameter indicates the interval of transmitting the CBPDU packet of the bridge.
l
The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
l
This parameter indicates the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state.
l
The greater the value, the longer the delay time of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
Priority (Bridge Parameter)
Max Age (s)
Hello Time (s)
Forward Delay (s)
TxHoldCout (per second)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
0–61440
6–40
1–10
4–30
1–10
32768
20
2
15
6
This parameter indicates the number of times the port transmits the CBPDU in every second.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-175
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority (Port Parameters)
0–240
128
l
The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority.
l
The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority.
l
This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to.
l
In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
l
This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used.
l
This parameter determines whether to set the port to an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected only to the LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU and does not transmit the BPDU.
l
This parameter is set to Enabled only when the Ethernet port of the Ethernet board is directly connected to the data communication terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
l
Specifies whether the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled for the port.
l
When this parameter is set to Disabled, the BPDU cannot be processed and transmitted.
l
It is recommended that this parameter adopts the default value.
l
This parameter is valid only when Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled.
l
When this parameter is set to Enabled, if the bridge detects that this port is connected to the port of other bridges, the RSTP considers this port as a non-edge port.
l
If Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled, set this parameter to Enabled. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Port Path Cost
Admin Edge Attribute
Protocol Enabled
Auto Edge Detection
9-176
1–65535
-
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-Point Attribute
Adaptive connection, Link connection, Shared media
Adaptive connection
l
This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used.
l
If this parameter is set to Adaptive connection, the bridge determines the actual point-to-point attribute of the port according to the actual working mode of the port. If the actual working mode of the port is full-duplex, the actual point-topoint attribute of the port is "true". If the actual working mode of the port is halfduplex, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false".
l
If this parameter is set to Link connection, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "true".
l
If this parameter is set to Shared media, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is "false".
l
Only the port whose point-to-point attribute is "true" can transmit the rapid transition request and response.
l
It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE
l
In the service networking process, it is recommended that you prevent the loop from forming in the case of the Layer 2 service and thus avoid enabling the STP or RSTP.
l
Because the RSTP and STP are complicated, it is recommended that you negotiate with the engineer in charge of maintaining the opposite Ethernet equipment and set the related parameters as instructed, before enabling the STP or RSTP.
9.17.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The VLAN filter table must be created.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-177
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Protocol Enable tab. Step 3 Set the information related to the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enable
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
l
This parameter determines whether to enable the IGMP Snooping protocol.
l
If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP Snooping protocol according to the requirement.
l
This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled.
l
If the 802.1q bridge or the 802.1ad bridge receives a multicast packet whose multicast address has no mapping item in the multicast table (that is, this multicast packet is an unknown multicast packet), this parameter indicates the method for processing this packet.
l
When this parameter is set to Enabled, The unknown multicast packet is discarded.
l
When this parameter is set to Disabled, the unknown multicast packet is broadcast in the VLAN.
l
Set this parameter according to the requirement of the IGMP multicast server.
The Discarded Tag of the Packet Excluded in the Multicast Group
9-178
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
9.17.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes by default.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout. The Ethernet LAN service must be created. The IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge must be enabled.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Multicast Aging Time tab. Step 3 Modify the aging time of the multicast table item.
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-179
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Multicast Aging Time (Min)
1–120
8
l
When a table item is not updated in a certain period (that is, no IGMP request from this multicast address is received), this table item is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time.
l
If this parameter is set to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive multicast table items that are outdated, which exhausts the resources of the multicast table.
l
If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the multicast table item that is needed, which reduces the forwarding efficiency.
9.17.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly received broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher. The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External Port. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold. 9-180
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Step 4 Click Apply. ----End
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable the broadcast packet suppression function.
Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
10% to 100%
30%
When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly received broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.
Enabled
9.18 Configuring the Service Access of NEs You can ensure the security of a network by setting the service access of the NEs on the network. 9.18.1 Configuring the LCT Access to NEs When an NE is managed by the NMS, the LCT cannot access this NE by default. 9.18.2 Configuring the Ethernet Access to an NE By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the Ethernet port. 9.18.3 Configuring the Serial Port Access to an NE By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the serial port.
9.18.1 Configuring the LCT Access to NEs When an NE is managed by the NMS, the LCT cannot access this NE by default.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Background Information l
If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has logged in, the NE determines whether to permit the login of the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch.
l
If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has not logged in, the NE permits the login of the LCT regardless of the status of LCT Access Control Switch. The NMS, however, can log in to an NE to which the LCT has logged in. That is, the login of the LCT does not affect the login of the NMS. After the NMS user logs in to the NE successfully, the logged LCT user is not affected. If LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access, the logged LCT user is also not affected.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-181
9 Configuration Task Collection
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
Procedure Step 1 Select the target NE in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Access Allowed to enable the LCT access function. NOTE
To disable the LCT access function, click Disable Access.
----End
9.18.2 Configuring the Ethernet Access to an NE By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the Ethernet port.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Background Information
9-182
l
It is recommended that the LCT accesses an NE by using the Ethernet port.
l
If you need to initialize an NE or perform software loading by using the LCT, the LCT needs to access the NE by using the Ethernet port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Procedure Step 1 Select the target NE in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the Enable Ethernet Access check box and click Apply to enable the Ethernet access function.
NOTE
To disable the Ethernet access function, do not select the Enable Ethernet Access check box and click Apply.
----End
9.18.3 Configuring the Serial Port Access to an NE By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the serial port.
Prerequisite You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Background Information If the LCT cannot access an NE through the serial port after the Enable Serial Port Access check box is selected, it indicates that the LCT access function may be disabled.
Procedure Step 1 Select the target NE in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the Enable Serial Port Access check box and select Access NM. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Select the baud rate of the serial port from the Baud Rate drop-down list. Click Apply to complete the setting. ----End Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-183
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
9 Configuration Task Collection
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Serial Port Access
Selected, not selected
Selected
If the Enable Serial Port Access check box is selected, the serial port access function is available.
Access Command Line
Selected, not selected
Not selected
If Access Command Line is selected, the serial port can be used to access the command line terminal.
Access NM
Selected, not selected
Selected
If Access NM is selected, the serial port can be used to access the NMS.
Baud Rate
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
9600
This parameter specifies the communication rate of the serial port. This parameter can be set only when the Enable Serial Port Access check box is selected.
9-184
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
A
Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. A.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. A.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. A.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. A.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. A.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. A.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
A.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1+1 protection
An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided.
1U
The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
802.1Q in 802.1Q
802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLAN tags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQ feature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.
A.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A ACAP
See adjacent channel alternate polarization
adaptive modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.
ADC
See Analog to Digital Converter
add/drop multiplexer
Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.
adjacent channel alternate polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer
A-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
Administrative Unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
AGC
See Automatic Gain Control
AM
See adaptive modulation
Analog to Digital Converter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS
See Automatic Protection Switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol
ASK
amplitude shift keying
ATPC
See automatic transmit power control
AU
See Administrative Unit
Automatic Gain Control
A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.
Automatic Protection Switching
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit power control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver
B Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Power control, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network. BER
See Bit Error Rate
BIOS
Basic Input Output System
BIP
Bit-Interleaved Parity
bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.
Bit Error Rate
Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.
BPDU
See Bridge Protocol Data Unit
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
BSC
See Base Station Controller
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
C C-VLAN
Customer VLAN
CAR
See committed access rate
CBS
See Committed Burst Size
CCDP
See Co-Channel Dual Polarization
Central Processing Unit
The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processor or central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place.
CF
See compact flash
CGMP
Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR
See Committed Information Rate
CIST
See Common and Internal Spanning Tree
Class of Service
A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs, the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from high to low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the services of low priority.
Co-Channel Dual Polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
committed access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.
Committed Burst Size
committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Committed Information Rate
The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket.
Common and Internal Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP and Spanning Tree RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridges and regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local Area Network are simply and fully connected. compact flash
Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure.
CoS
See Class of Service
CPU
See Central Processing Unit
CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Check
A-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
cross polarization interference cancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
Cyclic Redundancy Check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D Data Communication Network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).
Data Communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to Channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1–D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4–D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. DC
See Direct Current
DC-C
See DC-Return Common (with Ground)
DC-I
See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)
DC-Return Common (with Ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC
See Data Communications Channel
DCN
See Data Communication Network
Differentiated Services Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits Code Point 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB according to the DSCP value. digital modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Direct Current
Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.
DSCP
See Differentiated Services Code Point
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-5
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E E-LAN
Ethernet-LAN
ECC
See Embedded Control Channel
Electro Magnetic Interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. [NTIA]
Embedded Control Channel
An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
See Electro Magnetic Interference
EPL
See Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN
See ethernet private lan service
equalization
A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS
See ethernet ring protection switching
ES-IS
End System to Intermediate System
ethernet private lan service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedocated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet Private Line
A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
ethernet ring protection switching
protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
ethernet virtual private An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared lan service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. ethernet virtual private An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared line service bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
A-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
EVPL
See ethernet virtual private line service
EVPLAN
See ethernet virtual private lan service
A Glossary
A.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F Fast Ethernet
A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies with the IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard.
fast link pulse
The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FCS
Frame Check Sequence
FD
See frequency diversity
FE
See Fast Ethernet
FEC
See Forward Error Correction
Field Programmable Gate Array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arraies.
FIFO
See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
FLP
See fast link pulse
Forward Error Correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
FPGA
See Field Programmable Gate Array
frequency diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP
See File Transfer Protocol
G gateway network element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer
GE
See Gigabit Ethernet
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-7
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
Gigabit Ethernet
GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
GNE
See gateway network element
Graphical User Interface
A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS
See Generic traffic shaping
GUI
See Graphical User Interface
H HDB3
High Density Bipolar Code 3
HDLC
See High level Data Link Control procedure
High level Data Link Control procedure
A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links. Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocols including X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLC have been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP).
hot standby
A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system.
HSM
Hitless Switch Mode
hybrid radio
The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.
I ICMP
See Internet Control Messages Protocol
IDU
See indoor unit
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
The Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
See intermediate frequency
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
A-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
IGMP snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
indoor unit
The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol Intermediate System (IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm to calculate the route. International Electrotechnical Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
International Organization for Standardization
ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer and publisher of International Standards.
Internet Control Messages Protocol
ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messages during the transmission of IP-type data packets.
Internet Group Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet Protocol Version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
IP
See Internet Protocol
IPv6
See Internet Protocol Version 6
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO
See International Organization for Standardization
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-9
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
IVL
Independence VLAN learning
A.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
See Local Area Network
LAPD
Link Access Procedure on the D channel
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
layer 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LB
See Loopback
LCAS
See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LDPC
Low-Density Parity Check code
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.
LMSP
Linear Multiplex Section Protection
Local Area Network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LPT
Link State Path Through
M MA
See Maintenance Association
MAC
See Medium Access Control
MADM
Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
Maintenance Association
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.
A-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
Maintenance Domain
The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
Maintenance Point
Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
Management Information Base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.
Maximum Transfer Unit
The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can be sent over a network.
MBS
Maximum Burst Size
MD
See Maintenance Domain
MDI
See Medium Dependent Interface
Mean Time To Repair
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Medium Access Control
A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particular network. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses.
Medium Dependent Interface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission.
MEP
Maintenance End Point
MIB
See Management Information Base
MP
See Maintenance Point
MSP
See multiplex section protection
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR
See Mean Time To Repair
MTU
See Maximum Transfer Unit
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
N N+1 protection
A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel.
NE
See Network Element
Network Element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-11
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
network management system
The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
Network Service Access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can Point access OSI network services. NLP
Normal Link Pulse
NMS
See network management system
NNI
Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
non-gateway network element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE
See non-gateway network element
NSAP
See Network Service Access Point
O OAM
Operations, Administration and Maintenance
ODU
See outdoor unit
Open Shortest Path First
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.
Open Systems Interconnection
A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization of Standards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in a telecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions that take place at each end of a communication.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF
See Open Shortest Path First
outdoor unit
The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
A.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P PDH
See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. PIM-DM
Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM
See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
A-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
PIR
A Glossary
See Peak Information Rate
Plesiochronous Digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum Hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization
A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
PPP
See Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS
Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Protocol Independent A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and interMulticast-Sparse Mode domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is not dependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparsemode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (and their routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicast routing protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere and then pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructs a tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets from the sender then follow this tree.
Q QoS
See Quality of Service
QPSK
See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmission Keying through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER. Quality of Service
Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability, service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
R Radio Freqency
A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current.
Radio Network Controller
A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-13
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.
Received signal level
The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal Strength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
RF
See Radio Freqency
RFC
Request For Comment
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol
RMON
Remote Monitoring
RNC
See Radio Network Controller
Routing Information Protocol
Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
RS
Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL
Received Signal Level
RSSI
See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN
Radio Transmission Node
S SD
See space diversity
SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP
See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
Signal Noise Ratio
The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SNC
See SubNetwork Connection
SNCP
See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
A-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
SNR
See Signal Noise Ratio
SP
Strict Priority
space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
STM
See synchronous transport module
STM-1
SDH Transport Module -1
STM-1e
STM-1 Electrical Interface
STM-1o
STM-1 Optical Interface
STM-N
SDH Transport Module -N
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network
Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management.
SubNetwork Connection
A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
SubNetwork A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if Connection Protection the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVL
Shared VLAN Learning
Synchronization Status A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous Message timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold), and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-15
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
synchronous transport An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the module SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
T TCI
Tag Control Information
TCP
See TransmissionControl Protocol
TDM
See Time Division Multiplexing
Telecommunication The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-T Management Network for managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. Time Division Multiplexing
It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3……), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.
TMN
See Telecommunication Management Network
trail
A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred signals.
TransmissionControl Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.
TU
Tributary Unit
A.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U UDP
See User Datagram Protocol
UNI
See User Network Interface
A-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
User Datagram Protocol
A Glossary
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the interface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a private network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.
V VC
See Virtual Container
VC-12
Virtual Container -12
VC-3
Virtual Container -3
VC-4
Virtual Container -4
VCG
See virtual concatenation group
VCTRUNK
A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board
virtual concatenation group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link
Virtual Container
A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
Virtual Local Area Network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.
Virtual Private Network
The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.
VLAN
See Virtual Local Area Network
Voice over IP
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP
See Voice over IP
VPN
See Virtual Private Network
W Wait to Restore Time
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-17
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
A Glossary
WAN
See Wide Area Network
Web LCT
The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network
Wide Area Network
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country.
WRR
Weighted Round Robin
WTR
See Wait to Restore Time
X XPD
Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPIC
See cross polarization interference cancellation
A-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
